-
1 ἔχω
ἔχω (Hom.+) impf. εἶχον, 1 pl. εἴχαμεν and 3 pl. εἶχαν (both as vv.ll.; Mlt-H. 194; B-D-F §82) Mk 8:7; Rv 9:8 or εἴχοσαν (B-D-F §84, 2; Mlt-H. 194; Kühner-Bl. II p. 55) J 15:22, 24; 2 aor. ἔσχον; mixed aor. forms include ἔσχαν Hv 3, 5, 1, ἔσχοσαν 1 Esdr 6:5; 1 Macc 10:15 (ἔσχον, εἴχον vv.ll.); pf. ἔσχηκα; plpf. ἐσχήκειν.—In the following divisions: act. trans. 1–9; act. intr. 10; mid. 11.① to possess or contain, have, own (Hom.+)ⓐ to possess someth. that is under one’s controlα. own, possess (s. esp. TestJob 9f) κτήματα πολλά own much property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. πρόβατα Lk 15:4; J 10:16. θησαυρόν Mt 19:21; Mk 10:21b. βίον living Lk 21:4; 1J 3:17. δραχμὰς δέκα Lk 15:8. πλοῖα Rv 18:19. κληρονομίαν Eph 5:5. θυσιαστήριον Hb 13:10a; μέρος ἔ. ἔν τινι have a share in someth. Rv 20:6. Gener. μηδὲν ἔ. own nothing (SibOr 3, 244) 2 Cor 6:10. ὅσα ἔχεις Mk 10:21; cp. 12:44; Mt 13:44, 46; 18:25. τί ἔχεις ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔλαβες; what do you have that you have not been given? 1 Cor 4:7. The obj. acc. is often used w. an adj. or ptc.: ἔ. ἅπαντα κοινά have everything in common Ac 2:44 (cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 18). ἔ. πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ κείμενα have many good things stored up Lk 12:19.—Hb 12:1. Abs. ἔ. have (anything) (Soph.et al.; Sir 13:5; 14:11) Mt 13:12a; Mk 4:25a; Lk 8:18a. ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν in accordance w. what you have 2 Cor 8:11. ἔ. εἰς ἀπαρτισμόν have (enough) to complete Lk 14:28. W. neg. ἔ. have nothing Mt 13:12b; Mk 4:25b; Lk 8:18b.—ὁ ἔχων the one who has, who is well off (Soph., Aj. 157; Eur., Alc. 57; X., An. 7, 3, 28; Ar. 15:7). πᾶς ὁ ἔχων everyone who has (anything) Mt 25:29a; Lk 19:26a. ὁ μὴ ἔχων the one who has nothing (X., An. 7, 3, 28; 1 Esdr 9:51, 54; 2 Esdr 18:10) Mt 25:29b; Lk 19:26b; 1 Cor 11:22.β. have = hold in one’s charge or keeping ἔ. τὰς κλεῖς hold the keys Rv 1:18; cp. 3:7. τὸ γλωσσόκομον the money-box J 12:6; 13:29.ⓑ to contain someth. have, possess, of the whole in relation to its partsα. of living beings, of parts of the body in men and animals μέλη Ro 12:4a; cp. 1 Cor 12:12. σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα Lk 24:39 (Just., A I, 66, 2 καὶ σάρκα καὶ αἷμα) ἀκροβυστίαν Ac 11:3. οὖς Rv 2:7, 11. ὦτα Mt 11:15; Mk 7:16; Lk 8:8. χεῖρας, πόδας, ὀφθαλμούς Mt 18:8f; Mk 9:43, 45, 47. Of animals and animal-like beings ἔ. πρόσωπον Rv 4:7. πτέρυγας vs. 8. κέρατα 5:6. ψυχάς 8:9. τρίχας 9:8. κεφαλάς 12:3 (TestAbr B 14 p. 118, 19 [Stone p. 84]) al. ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32 (Just., D. 48, 3 σάρκα ἔχων). Of plants (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62] εὗρον δένδρον … ἔχον κλάδους) ῥίζαν ἔ. Mt 13:6; Mk 4:6.β. of inanimate things: of cities τ. θεμελίους ἔ. Hb 11:10; cp. Rv 21:14. Of a head-covering χαρακτῆρα ἔχει βασιλικόν has a royal emblem GJs 2:2.ⓒ to have at hand, have at one’s disposal have ἄρτους Mt 14:17; cp. 15:34; J 21:5, where the sense is prob. ‘Did you catch any fish for breakfast?’. οὐκ ἔχω ὸ̔ παραθήσω αὐτῷ I have nothing to set before him Lk 11:6. μὴ ἐχόντων τί φάγωσι since they had nothing to eat Mk 8:1; cp. Mt 15:32 (Soph., Oed. Col. 316 οὐκ ἔχω τί φῶ). οὐκ ἔχω ποῦ συνάξω I have no place to store Lk 12:17. ἄντλημα a bucket J 4:11a. οἰκίας ἔ. have houses (at one’s disposal) 1 Cor 11:22. Of pers.: have (at one’s disposal) (PAmh 92, 18 οὐχ ἕξω κοινωνόν and oft. in pap) Moses and the prophets Lk 16:29. παράκλητον an advocate, a helper 1J 2:1. οὐδένα ἔ. ἰσόψυχον Phil 2:20. ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἔ. J 5:7.ⓓ to have within oneself have σύλλημα ἔχει ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου she has something conceived through the Holy Spirit GJs 18:1. Var. constr. w. ἐν: of women ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. be pregnant (γαστήρ 2) Mt 1:18, 23 (Is 7:14); 24:19; Mk 13:17; Lk 21:23; 1 Th 5:3; Rv 12:2. ἔ. τινὰ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ have someone in one’s heart Phil 1:7 (Ovid, Metam. 2, 641 aliquem clausum pectore habere). ἔ. τι ἐν ἑαυτῷ (Jos., Ant. 8, 171; cp. TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 14 [Stone p. 8] ἔκρυψεν τὸ μυστήριον, μόνος ἔχων ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ): ζωήν J 5:26. τὴν μαρτυρίαν 1J 5:10; τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου have a sentence of death within oneself 2 Cor 1:9.ⓔ to have with oneself or in one’s company have μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 17) τινά someone Mt 15:30; 26:11; Mk 2:19; 14:7; J 12:8; AcPl Ha 8, 35; σὺν αὐτῷ 4:18.—The ptc. w. acc. = with (Diod S 12, 78, 1 ἔχων δύναμιν with a [military] force; 18, 61, 1 ὁ θρόνος ἔχων τὸ διάδημα the throne with the diadem; JosAs 27:8 ἔχοντες ἐσπασμένας τὰς ῥομφαίας ‘with their swords drawn’) ἀνέβησαν ἔχοντες αὐτόν they went up with him Lk 2:42 D.② to stand in a close relationship to someone, have, have asⓐ of relatives πατέρα ἔ. J 8:41. ἀδελφούς Lk 16:28. ἄνδρα (Aristot., Cat. 15b, 27f λεγόμεθα δὲ καὶ γυναῖκα ἔχειν καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἄνδρα; Tob 3:8 BA) be married (of the woman) J 4:17f; 1 Cor 7:2b, 13; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). γυναῖκα of the man (cp. Lucian, Tox. 45; SIG 1160 γυναικὸς Αἴ., τῆς νῦν ἔχει; PGM 13, 320; 1 Esdr 9:12, 18; Just., D. 141, 4 πολλὰς ἔσχον γυναίκας. As early as Od. 11, 603 Heracles ἔχει Ἥβην) 1 Cor 7:2a, 12, 29 (for the wordplay cp. Heliod. 1, 18, 4 in connection w. the handing over of a virgin: σὺ ἔχων οὐκ ἕξεις; Crates, 7th Ep. [p. 58, 8 Malherbe] πάντʼ ἔχοντες οὐδὲν ἔχετε). τέκνα Mt 21:28; 22:24; 1 Ti 3:4; 5:4; Tit 1:6. υἱούς (Artem. 5, 42 τὶς τρεῖς ἔχων υἱούς; cp. θυγατέρα TestAbr B 10 p. 114, 17 [Stone p.76]) Lk 15:11; Gal 4:22. σπέρμα have children Mt 22:25. W. acc. as obj. and in predicate (Ar. 8, 4 τούτους συνηγόρους ἔχοντες τῆς κακίας; 11, 3 ἔσχε μοιχὸν τὸν Ἄρην; Ath. 7, 2 ἔχομεν προφήτας μάρτυρας) ἔ. τινὰ πατέρα have someone as father Mt 3:9. ἔ. τινὰ γυναῖκα (w. γυναῖκα to be understood fr. the context) 14:4; cp. Mk 6:18; ὥστε γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔ. that someone has taken his father’s wife (as his own wife: the simple ἔχειν in this sense as Plut., Cato Min. 21, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 10 §34; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 147. Perh. an illicit relationship is meant, as Longus 4, 17; Hesychius Miles. [VI A.D.], Viri Ill. 4 JFlach [1880] ἔχω Λαί̈δα) 1 Cor 5:1 (Diod S 20, 33, 5 of a man who had illicit relations with his stepmother: ἔχειν λάθρᾳ τοῦ πατρὸς τὴν Ἀλκίαν).ⓑ more gener. φίλον have a friend Lk 11:5. ἀσθενοῦντας have sick people Lk 4:40 and χήρας widows 1 Ti 5:16 to care for; παιδαγωγοὺς ἔ. 1 Cor 4:15. δοῦλον Lk 17:7. οἰκονόμον 16:1; κύριον ἔ. have a master, i.e. be under a master’s control Col 4:1; δεσπότην ἔ. 1 Ti 6:2; βασιλέα J 19:15. ἀρχιερέα Hb 4:14; 8:1. ποιμένα Mt 9:36. ἔχων ὑπʼ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας I have soldiers under me Lk 7:8. W. direct obj. and predicate acc. ἔ. τινὰ ὑπηρέτην have someone as an assistant Ac 13:5 (Just., A I, 14, 1) ἔ. τινὰ τύπον have someone as an example Phil 3:17.—Of the relation of Christians to God and to Jesus ἔ. θεόν, τὸν πατέρα, τὸν υἱόν have God, the Father, the Son, i.e. be in communion w. them 1J 2:23; 2J 9; AcPl Ha 4, 7.—HHanse, at end of this entry.③ to take a hold on someth., have, hold (to), gripⓐ of holding someth. in one’s hand ἔ. τι ἐν τῇ χειρί have someth. in one’s hand (since Il. 18, 505) Rv 1:16; 6:5; 10:2; 17:4. Of holding in the hand without ἐν τῇ χειρί (Josh 6:8; JosAs 5:7) ἔ. κιθάραν 5:8. λιβανωτὸν χρυσοῦν 8:3, cp. vs. 6; 14:17 and s. ἀλάβαστρον Mt 26:7 and Mk 14:3.ⓑ of keeping someth. safe, a mina (a laborer’s wages for about three months) in a handkerchief keep safe Lk 19:20.ⓒ of holding fast to matters of transcendent importance, fig. τὴν μαρτυρίαν Rv 6:9; 12:17; 19:10; the secret of Christian piety 1 Ti 3:9; an example of sound teaching 2 Ti 1:13; keep (Diod S 17, 93, 1 τὴν βασιλείαν ἔχειν=keep control) Mk 6:18.ⓓ of states of being hold, hold in its grip, seize (Hom. et al.; PGiss 65a, 4 παρακαλῶ σε κύριέ μου, εἰδότα τὴν ἔχουσάν με συμφορὰν ἀπολῦσαί μοι; Job 21:6; Is 13:8; Jos., Ant. 3, 95 δέος εἶχε τοὺς Ἑβρ.; 5, 63; Just., D. 19, 3) εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις trembling and amazement had seized them Mk 16:8.④ to carry/bear as accessory or part of a whole, have on, wear, of clothing, weapons, etc. (Hom. et al.; LXX; TestAbr B p. 114, 22 [Stone p. 76]) τὸ ἔνδυμα Mt 3:4; 22:12 (cp. ἔνδυσιν TestJob 25:7). κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων w. τὶ to be supplied while he wears (a covering) on his head 1 Cor 11:4. ἔ. θώρακας Rv 9:9, 17. ἔ. μάχαιραν wear a sword (Jos., Ant. 6, 190) J 18:10. Sim. of trees ἔ. φύλλα have leaves Mk 11:13 (ApcSed. 8:8).⑤ be in a position to do someth., can, be able, ἔ. w. inf. foll. (Hom. et al.; cp. Eur., Hec. 761; Hdt. 1, 49; Pla., Phd. p. 76d; Demosth., Ep. 2, 22; Theocr. 10, 37 τὸν τρόπον οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν=I cannot specify the manner; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 21, 2, Hermot. 55; Epict. 1, 9, 32; 2, 2, 24 al.; Ael. Aristid. 51, 50 K.=27 p. 546 D.: οὐκ ἔχω λέγειν; PPetr II, 12, 1, 16; PAmh 131, 15; Pr 3:27; ApcEsdr 2:24; 3:7; 6:5; TestAbr A 8, p. 86, 13 [Stone p. 20]; Jos., Ant. 1, 338; 2, 58; Just., A I, 19, 5, D. 4, 6 οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν) ἔ. ἀποδοῦναι be able to pay Mt 18:25a; Lk 7:42; 14:14. μὴ ἔ. περισσότερον τι ποιῆσαι be in a position to do nothing more 12:4. οὐδὲν ἔ. ἀντειπεῖν be able to make a reply Ac 4:14; cp. Tit 2:8. ἔ. κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ J 8:6 (cp. 9a below, end). ἀσφαλές τι γράψαι οὐκ ἔχω I have nothing definite to write Ac 25:26a; cp. 26b. ἔ. μεταδιδόναι Eph 4:28a. ἔ. τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι be able to recall these things to mind 2 Pt 1:15. κατʼ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι he could swear by no one greater Hb 6:13. In the same sense without the actual addition of the inf., which is automatically supplied fr. context (X., An. 2, 1, 9) ὸ̔ ἔσχεν (i.e. ποιῆσαι) ἐποίησεν she has done what she could Mk 14:8.⑥ to have an opinion about someth., consider, look upon, view w. acc. as obj. and predicate acc. (POxy 292, 6 [c. 25 A.D.] ἔχειν αὐτὸν συνεσταμένον=look upon him as recommended; 787 [16 A.D.]; PGiss 71, 4; Job 30:9; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 19; Ath. 32, 3 τοὺς μὲν υἱοὺς … νοοῦμεν, τοὺς δὲ ἀδελφούς ἔχομεν) ἔχε με παρῃτημένον consider me excused (= don’t expect me to come) Lk 14:18b, 19 (cp. Martial 2, 79 excusatum habeas me). τινὰ ἔντιμον ἔ. hold someone in honor Phil 2:29. ἔ. τινὰ ὡς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 14:5; 21:26, 46 v.l. (cp. GNicod 5 [=Acta Pilati B 5 p. 297 Tdf.] ἔχειν [Jannes and Jambres] ὡς θεούς; Just., D. 47, 5 τὸν μετανοοῦντα … ὡς δίκαιον καὶ ἀναμάρτητον ἔχει). ἔ. τινὰ εἰς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 21:46 (cp. Duris [III B.C.]: 76 Fgm. 21 Jac. ὸ̔ν εἰς θεοὺς ἔχουσιν). εἶχον τ. Ἰωάννην ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν they thought that John was really a prophet Mk 11:32.⑦ to experience someth., have (freq. in auxiliary capacity CTurner, JTS 28, 1927, 357–60)ⓐ of all conditions of body and soul (Hom. et al.; LXX)α. of illness, et al. (ApcMos 6 νόσον καὶ πόνον ἔχω; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 305) ἀσθενείας have sicknesses/diseases Ac 28:9. μάστιγας physical troubles Mk 3:10. πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης Rv 13:14. θλῖψιν J 16:33b; 1 Cor 7:28; Rv 2:10. Esp. of possession by hostile spirits: δαιμόνιον ἔ. be possessed by an evil spirit Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; 8:27; J 7:20; 8:48f, 52; 10:20. Βεελζεβούλ Mk 3:22. πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον vs. 30; 7:25; Ac 8:7. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου Lk 4:33. πνεῦμα πονηρόν Ac 19:13. πνεῦμα ἄλαλον Mk 9:17. πνεῦμα ἀσθενείας spirit of sickness Lk 13:11. τὸν λεγιῶνα (the evil spirit called) Legion Mk 5:15.β. gener. of conditions, characteristics, capabilities, emotions, inner possession: ἀγάπην ἔ. have love (cp. Diod S 3, 58, 3 φιλίαν ἔχειν; Just., D. 93, 4 φιλίαν ἢ ἀγάπην ἔχοντε) J 5:42; 13:35; 15:13; 1J 4:16; 1 Cor 13:1ff; 2 Cor 2:4; Phil 2:2; 1 Pt 4:8. ἀγνωσίαν θεοῦ fail to know God 1 Cor 15:34. ἁμαρτίαν J 9:41; 15:22a. ἀσθένειαν Hb 7:28. γνῶσιν 1 Cor 8:1, 10 (Just., A II, 13, 1; D. 28, 4). ἐλπίδα Ac 24:15; Ro 15:4; 2 Cor 3:12; 10:15; Eph 2:12; 1J 3:3 (Ath. 33, 1). ἐπιθυμίαν Phil 1:23. ἐπιποθίαν Ro 15:23b; ζῆλον ἔ. have zeal Ro 10:2. Have jealousy Js 3:14. θυμόν Rv 12:12. λύπην (ApcMos 3 p. 2, 16 Tdf.) J 16:21f; 2 Cor 2:3; Phil 2:27; μνείαν τινὸς ἔ. remember someone 1 Th 3:6. παρρησίαν Phlm 8; Hb 10:19; 1J 2:28; 3:21; 4:17; 5:14. πεποίθησιν 2 Cor 3:4; Phil 3:4. πίστιν Mt 17:20; 21:21; Mk 4:40; Ac 14:9; Ro 14:22; 1 Cor 13:2; 1 Ti 1:19 al. (Just., A I, 52, 1). προφητείαν have the gift of prophecy 1 Cor 13:2. σοφίαν (X., Mem. 2, 3, 10) Rv 17:9. συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν Hb 10:2. καλὴν συνείδησιν 13:18; ἀγαθὴν ς. 1 Ti 1:19; 1 Pt 3:16; ἀπρόσκοπον ς. Ac 24:16; ὑπομονήν Rv 2:3. φόβον 1 Ti 5:20. χαράν Phlm 7. χάριν ἔ. τινί be grateful to someone Lk 17:9; 1 Ti 1:12; 2 Ti 1:3; σιγὴν ἔ. be silent Hs 9, 11, 5. ἀνάγκην ἔσχον I felt it necessary Jd 3 (HKoskenniemi, Studien zur Idee und Phraseologie des Griechischen Briefes bis 400 n. Chr. ’56, 78–87).γ. of advantages, benefits, or comforts that one enjoys: ἔ. τὰ αἰτήματα to have been granted the requests 1J 5:15; ἀνάπαυσιν ἔ. have rest Rv 4:8; 14:11; ἀπόλαυσιν τινος ἔ. enjoy someth. Hb 11:25. βάθος γῆς Mt 13:5b; Mk 4:5b; γῆν πολλήν Mt 13:5a; Mk 4:5a. τὴν προσέλευσιν τὴν πρὸς τὸν κύριον AcPl Ha 8, 22f; εἰρήνην Ro 5:1. ἐλευθερίαν Gal 2:4. S. ἐξουσία, ἐπαγγελία, ἔπαινος, ζωή, ἰκμάς, καιρός, καρπός, καύχημα, καύχησις, λόγος, μισθός, νοῦς, πνεῦμα, προσαγωγή, πρόφασις, τιμή, χάρις (=favor), χάρισμα.δ. of a sense of obligation in regard to someth.—W. dir. object have = have someth. over one, be under someth.: ἀνάγκην ἔχειν be under necessity 1 Cor 7:37a; w. inf. foll. have a need (ἀνάγκη 1) Lk 14:18; 23:16 v.l.; Hb 7:27; χρείαν ἔ. be in need abs. Eph 4:28b; τινός need someth. (Aeschyl. et al.; SIG 333, 20; 421, 35 al.; PPetr III, 42 G 9, 7 [III B.C.] ἐάν τινος χρείαν ἔχῃς; Ath. 13, 2 ποίας ἔτι χρείαν ἑκατόμβης ἔχει;) Mt 6:8; 9:12a; Mk 11:3; Lk 19:31, 34; J 13:29; 1 Cor 12:21; Hb 10:36 al.; w. inf. foll. (TestSol 13:2) Mt 3:14; 14:16; J 13:10; 1 Th 1:8; 4:9; 5:1. νόμον J 19:7. ἐπιταγήν 1 Cor 7:25. ἐντολήν (SIG 559, 9 ἔ. τὰς ἰντολάς; 1 Esdr 4:52; 2 Macc 3:13; Jos., Bell. 1, 261) Hb 7:5; 1J 2:7; 4:21; 2J 5; cp. J 14:21. διακονίαν 2 Cor 4:1. ἀγῶνα Phil 1:30; Col 2:1. πρᾶξιν Ro 12:4b. ἔγκλημα Ac 23:29. κόλασιν ApcPt Bodl. (ApcEsdr 1:22 p. 25, 17 Tdf.).ε. of a sense of inevitability in respect to some action.—W. inf. foll. one must (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 1, 3 καθαιρεθῆναι ἔχεις=you must be deposed; Porphyr., Against the Christians 63 Harnack [ABA 1916] παθεῖν; Gen 18:31; Jos., Ant. 19, 348 τοῦ τεθνάναι; TestSol 5:12 σίδηρα ἔχεις φορέσαι; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 22 [Stone p. 48] τοῦ βίου τοῦτου ἀπαλλάξαι εἶχες; Just., D. 51, 2 ἔργῳ πεισθήναι ὑμῶν ἐχόντων) βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι I must undergo a baptism Lk 12:50. ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν I have someth. to say to you (Lucian, Philops. 1 ἔχεις μοι εἰπεῖν. Without dat. Aelian, VH 2, 23; Jos., Ant. 16, 312) 7:40. καινόν σοι θέαμα ἔχω ἐξηγήσασθαι I have a wonderful new thing to tell you=‘I must tell you about something wonderful that I’ve just seen’ GJs 19:3. ἀπαγγεῖλαι Ac 23:17, 19; cp. vs. 18. πολλὰ γράφειν 2J 12; 3J 13.ⓑ of temporal circumstances w. indications of time and age: πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις you are not yet fifty years old J 8:57 (cp. Jos., Ant. 1, 198). τριάκοντα κ. ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ αὐτοῦ who had been sick for 38 years 5:5 (Cyranides p. 63, 25 πολὺν χρόνον ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀρρωστίᾳ. W. cardinal numeral TestJob 26:1 δέκα ἑπτὰ ἔτη ἔχω ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς; POxy 1862, 17 τέσσαρες μῆνας ἔχει. Mirac. S. Georgii 44, 7 [JAufhauser 1913] ἔσχεν … ἔτη ἑπτά); cp. Mt 9:20 v.l. τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἔ. ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ have lain in the grave for four days J 11:17 (Jos., Ant. 7, 1 αὐτοῦ δύο ἡμέρας ἔχοντος ἐν τῇ Σεκέλλᾳ). πολὺν χρόνον ἔ. be (somewhere or in a certain condition) for a long time 5:6. ἡλικίαν ἔχειν be of age (Pla., Euthyd. 32, 306d; Plut., Mor. 547a; BGU 168 τοῖς ἀτελέσι ἔχουσι τὴν ἡλικίαν) 9:21, 23. τέλος ἔχειν have an end, be at an end (Lucian, Charon 17; UPZ 81 III, 20 [II A.D.] τέλος ἔχει πάντα; Ar. 4:2 ἀρχὴν καὶ τέλος) Mk 3:26; Lk 22:37 (on the latter pass. s. τέλος 2); cp. Hb 7:3.⑧ as connective marker, to have or include in itself, bring about, cause w. acc. (Hom. et al.; Wsd 8:16) of ὑπομονή: ἔργον τέλειον Js 1:4. Of πίστις: ἔργα 2:17. Of φόβος: κόλασιν 1J 4:18. Of παρρησία: μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν Hb 10:35. Of πολυτέλεια: λύπην, χαράν Hs 1, 10. ἐσχάτην εὐλογίαν, ἥτις διαδοχὴν οὐκ ἔχει ultimate blessing, which has no successor GJs 6:2.⑨ special combinationsⓐ w. prep. ἐν: τὸν θεὸν ἔ. ἐν ἐπιγνώσει acknowledge God Ro 1:28 (cp. ἐν ὀργῇ ἔ. τινά=‘be angry at someone’, Thu. 2, 18, 5; 2, 21, 3; ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔ. τ. 2, 89, 1; ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔ. τ.=‘be glad to see someone’ 3, 9, 1; ἐν εὐνοίᾳ ἔ. Demosth. 18, 167). ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (ἕτοιμος b). ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν he has no hold on me J 14:30 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 32 §125 ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι=have someth. [hope of safety] in someone). κατά τινος: on 1 Cor 11:4 s. above 4. ἔ. τι κατά τινος have someth. against someone Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:14. ἔ. κατά τινος w. sim. mng. Hm 2:2; Hs 9, 23, 2; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:4, 20. ἔ. τινὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον meet someone face to face Ac 25:16. μετά: ἔ. τι μετά τινος have someth. w. someone κρίματα lawsuits 1 Cor 6:7. περί: ἔ. περί τινος have (a word, a reference, an explanation) about someth. B 12:1; with adv. τελείως 10:10. πρός τινα have someth. against someone (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21 ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον) Ac 24:19. ζητήματα ἔ. πρός τινα have differences w. someone (on points in question) 25:19. λόγον ἔ. πρός τινα 19:38. πρᾶγμα (=Lat. causa, ‘lawsuit’: BGU 19 I, 5; 361 II, 4) ἔ. πρός τινα (POxy 743, 19 [2 B.C.] εἰ πρὸς ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα; BGU 22:8) 1 Cor 6:1. ἵνα ἔχωσιν κατηγορίαν αὐτοῦ J 8:4 D (cp. 5 above). πρός τινα ἔ. μομφήν have a complaint against someone Col 3:13.ⓑ τοῦτο ἔχεις ὅτι you have this (in your favor), that Rv 2:6. ἔ. ὁδόν be situated (a certain distance) away (cp. Peripl. Eryth. 37: Ὡραία ἔχουσα ὁδὸν ἡμερῶν ἑπτὰ ἀπὸ θαλάσσης) of the Mt. of Olives ὅ ἐστιν ἐγγὺς Ἰερουσαλὴμ σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν Ac 1:12.—ἴδε ἔχεις τὸ σόν here you have what is yours Mt 25:25. ἔχετε κουστωδίαν there you have a guard (=you can have a guard) 27:65 (cp. POxy 33 III, 4).⑩ to be in some state or condition, act. intr. (spatially: Ath. 25, 1 οἱ ἄγγελοι … περὶ τόν ἀέρα ἔχοντες καὶ τὴν γῆν) w. adv. (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).ⓐ impers. it is, the situation is (Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 10 πῶς ὑμῖν ἔχειν ταῦτα δοκεῖ; =how does this situation seem to you? Just., D. 3, 5 τὸ … ὡσαύτως ἀεὶ ἔχων) ἄλλως 1 Ti 5:25. οὕτως (Antig. Car. 20; Cebes 4, 1; POxy 294, 11 [22 A.D.] εἰ ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; TestSol 20:8; Jos., Ant. 15, 261; Just., D. 3:5 οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει) Ac 7:1; 12:15; 17:11; 24:9. τὸ καλῶς ἔχον what is right 1 Cl 14:2 (Michel 543, 12 [c. 200 B.C.] καλῶς ἔχον ἐστὶ τιμᾶσθαι τοὺς εὔνους ἄνδρας). τὸ νῦν ἔχον for the present Ac 24:25 (cp. Plut., Mor. 749a; Lucian, Anachars. 40, Catapl. 13 τὸ δὲ νῦν ἔχον μὴ διάτριβε; Tob 7:11).ⓑ pers. be (in a certain way) πῶς ἔχουσιν how they are Ac 15:36 (cp. Gen 43:27; Jos., Ant. 4, 112). ἑτοίμως ἔ. be ready, hold oneself in readiness w. inf. foll. (BGU 80, 17 [II A.D.] ἡ Σωτηρία ἑτοίμως ἔχουσα καταγράψαι; Da 3:15 LXX; Jos., Ant. 13, 6; Just., D. 50, 1) 21:13; 2 Cor 12:14; 1 Pt 4:5. Also ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (s. ἕτοιμος b end). εὖ ἔ. be well-disposed πρός τινα toward someone Hs 9, 10, 7 (cp. Demosth. 9, 63 ἥδιον ἔχειν πρός τινα; SIG 1094, 4 φιλανθρώπως ἔχει πρὸς πάντας). κακῶς ἔ. be sick (Aristoph. et al.; POxy 935, 15; Ezk 34:4) Mt 4:24; 8:16; 9:12b; 17:15 v.l. (see πάσχω 2). καλῶς ἔ. be well, healthy (Epict. 1, 11, 4; PGen 54, 8; PFlor 230, 24) Mk 16:18; ἐσχάτως ἔ. (s. ἐσχάτως) 5:23; κομψότερον ἔ. feel better (κομψῶς ἔ.: Epict. 2, 18, 14; 3, 10, 13; PParis 18; PTebt 414, 10 ἐὰν κομψῶς σχῶ) J 4:52.⑪ to be closely associated, in a variety of renderings, hold fast, be next to, be next, mid. (Hom. et al.) in NT only ptc.ⓐ of proper situation or placement, esp. of inner belonging hold fast, cling to. The ‘to’ of belonging and the ‘with’ of association are expressed by the gen. (Theognis 1, 32 ἀεὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο=ever hold fast to the good people; X., Oec. 6, 1; Pla., Leg. 7, 811d; Lucian, Hermot. 69 ἐλπίδος οὐ μικρᾶς ἐχόμενα λέγεις; Sallust. 14 p. 26, 24 τ. θεῶν; Philo, Agr. 101 τὰ ἀρετῆς ἐχόμενα; Jos., Ant. 10, 204 οὐδὲν ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας ἐχόμενον, C. Ap. 1, 83 παλαιᾶς ἱστορίας ἐχόμενον; Just., A I, 68, 1 λόγου καὶ ἀληθείας ἔχεσθαι; Tat. 33, 1 μανίας ἔχεται πολλῆς; Ath., R. 48, 3 λόγῳ … ἀληθείας ἐχομένῳ) τὰ ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας things that belong to salvation Hb 6:9.ⓑ of proximityα. spatial, to be next to someth: ἐχόμενος neighboring (Isocr. 4, 96 νῆσος; Hdt. 1, 134 al. οἱ ἐχόμενοι=‘the neighbors’; Diod S 5, 15, 1; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 71 §294; Arrian, Peripl. 7, 2; PParis 51, 5 and oft. in pap; 1 Esdr 4:42; Jos., Ant. 6, 6 πρὸς τὰς ἐχομένας πόλεις; 11, 340) κωμοπόλεις Mk 1:38.β. temporal, to be next, immediately following (Thu. 6, 3, 2 τ. ἐχομένου ἔτους al.; SIG 800, 15; PRev 34, 20; PAmh 49, 4; PTebt 124, 43; LXX) τῇ ἐχομένῃ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ, as Polyb. 3, 112, 1; 5, 13, 9; 2 Macc 12:39; Jos., Ant. 6, 235; 7, 18 al.; cp. εἰς τὴν ἐχομένην [i.e. ἡμέραν] PMich 173, 16 [III B.C.]) on the next day Lk 13:33 (v.l. ἐρχομένῃ); Ac 20:15; w. ἡμέρᾳ added (PAmh 50, 17) 21:26. τῷ ἐχομένῳ σαββάτῳ 13:44 v.l. (for ἐρχομένῳ; cp. 1 Macc 4:28, where the witnesses are similarly divided).—On the whole word HHanse, ‘Gott Haben’ in d. Antike u. im frühen Christentum ’39.—B. 641; 740. EDNT. M-M. TW. Sv. -
2 δίδωμι
δίδωμι (Hom.+) by-form διδῶ (B-D-F §94, 1; Rob. 311f) Rv 3:9 (δίδω Tregelles, δίδωμι v.l.), 3 sg. διδοῖ (GrBar 7:2), 3 pl. διδόασι; impf. 3 sg. ἐδίδου, ἐδίδει (Hs 6, 2, 7; cp. Mk 4:8 cod. W), 3 pl. ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδοσαν J 19:3; ptc. διδῶν (Hs 8, 3, 3); fut. δώσω; 1 aor. ἔδωκα, subj. 3 sg. δώσῃ J 17:2; Rv 8:3 v.l. (on this W-S.§14, 9; B-D-F §95, 1; Rob. 308f), 1 pl. δώσωμεν Mk 6:37 v.l., 3 pl. δώσωσιν Rv 4:9 v.l.; pf. δέδωκα; plpf. ἐδεδώκειν (and without augm. δεδώκειν Mk 14:44; Lk 19:15; J 11:57); 2 aor. subj. 3 sg. δῷ J 15:16 (δώῃ v.l.); also in the form δώῃ Eph 1:17; 2 Ti 2:25 (in both δῷ as v.l.): in all these cases read δώῃ subj., not δῴη opt., s. below; δοῖ Mk 8:37 (B-D-F §95, 2; Mlt. 55; Rdm.2 97f and Glotta 7, 1916, 21ff; GKilpatrick in Festschrift JSchmid ’63, 135), pl. δῶμεν, δῶτε, δῶσιν; 2 aor. opt. 3 sg. Hellenist. (also LXX) δῴη for δοίη Ro 15:5; 2 Th 3:16; 2 Ti 1:16, 18 (on Eph 1:17; 2 Ti 2:25 s. above); 2 aor. impv. δός, δότε, inf. δοῦναι, ptc. δούς; pf. δέδωκα LXX. Pass.: 1 fut. δοθήσομαι (W-S. §14, 8ff); 1 aor. ἐδόθην; pf. δέδομαι.① to give as an expression of generosity, give, donate as a gen. principle: μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν it is more blessed to give than to receive Ac 20:35 (Theophyl. Sim., Ep. 42 τὸ διδόναι ἢ τὸ λαβεῖν οἰκειότερον); cp. 1 Cl 2:1; Hm 2:4ff (the contrast δίδωμι … λαμβάνω is frequently found: Epicharmus, Fgm. 273 Kaibel; Com. Fgm. Adesp. 108, 4 K.; Maximus Tyr. 32, 10c ὀλίγα δούς, μεγάλα ἔλαβες; Sir 14:16; Tat. 29, 2).—On the logion Ac 20:35 s. Unknown Sayings 77–81: giving is blessed, not receiving (cp. EHaenchen on Ac 20:35; Aristot., EN 4, 3, 26; Plut., Mor. 173d). S. μᾶλλον 3c. δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς give to the poor Mt 19:21 (HvonCampenhausen, Tradition u. Leben ’60, 114–56). τινὶ ἔκ τινος give someone some (of a substance: Tob 4:16; Ezk 48:12) Mt 25:8. S. also 7:11; 14:7.② to give someth. out, give, bestow, grant δ. δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα put a ring on the finger Lk 15:22 (cp. Esth 3:10—δίδωμί τι εἰς τ. χεῖρα also Aristoph., Nub. 506; Herodas 3, 70). give τινί τι someth. to someone τὸ ἅγιον τοῖς κυσίν Mt 7:6 (Ps.-Lucian, Asin. 33 τὰ ἔγκατα τοῖς κυσὶ δότε).—A certificate of divorce to one’s wife 5:31 (Dt 24:1; conversely of the wife Just., A II, 2, 6 ῥεπούδιον δοῦσα); without dat. 19:7. Of bread (w. dat. or acc. somet. to be supplied fr. the context) 26:26f; Mk 2:26; 14:22; Lk 6:4; 11:7f; 22:19; J 21:13 (difft. Mt 14:19; 15:36; Mk 6:41; 8:6 the disciples transfer to others what they have received). W. inf. foll. δ. τινὶ φαγεῖν give someone someth. to eat Mt 14:16; 25:35, 42; Mk 5:43; 6:37; J 6:31 al. (cp. Gen 28:20; Ex 16:8, 15; Lev 10:17); someth. to drink Mt 27:34; Mk 15:23; J 4:7; Rv 16:6 (Hdt. 4, 172, 4; Aristoph., Pax 49; Jos., Ant. 2, 64; schol. on Nicander, Alexiph. 146 δὸς πιεῖν τί τινι, without dat. 198; PGM 13, 320 δὸς πεῖν[=πιεῖν]; Jos., Ant. 2, 64).—τὰς ῥάβδους GJs 9:1.—Lk 15:29 (Hipponax 43 Deg.).③ to express devotion, give δόξαν δ. θεῷ give God the glory, i.e. praise, honor, thanks (Josh 7:19; Ps 67:35; 1 Esdr 9:8; 2 Ch 30:8 and oft.) Lk 17:18; J 9:24 (practically=promise under oath to tell the truth); Ac 12:23 al. δόξαν καὶ τιμήν (2 Ch 32:33) give glory and honor Rv 4:9. Through a sacrificial offering θυσίαν δ. bring an offering Lk 2:24 (cp. Jos., Ant. 7, 196 θυσίαν ἀποδοῦναι τ. θεῷ).④ to cause to happen, esp. in ref. to physical phenomena, produce, make, cause, give fig. extension of mng. 1 ὑετὸν δ. (3 Km 17:14; Job 5:10; Zech 10:1; PsSol 5:9) yield rain Js 5:18; send rain Ac 14:17. τέρατα cause wonders to appear Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3). Of heavenly bodies φέγγος δ. give light, shine Mt 24:29; Mk 13:24 (cp. Is 13:10). Of a musical instrument φωνὴν δ. (cp. Ps 17:14; 103:12; Jdth 14:9; Pind., N. 5, 50b [93]) produce a sound 1 Cor 14:7f.⑤ to put someth. in care of another, entrustⓐ of things entrust τινί τι someth. to someone money Mt 25:15; Lk 19:13, 15; the keys of the kgdm. Mt 16:19; perh. Lk 12:48. W. εἰς τὰς χεῖρας added J 13:3 (cp. Gen 39:8; Is 22:21; 29:12 al.) or ἐν τῇ χειρί τινος 3:35 (cp. Jdth 9:9; Da 1:2; 7:25 Theod.; 1 Macc 2:7). Of spiritual things J 17:8, 14; Ac 7:38.ⓑ of pers. τινά τινι entrust someone to another’s care J 6:37, 39; 17:6, 9, 12, 24; Hb 2:13 (Is 8:18).ⓐ of payment pay, give τινί τι Mt 20:4; 26:15; 28:12; Mk 14:11; Lk 22:5; Rv 11:18. Fig. repay someone (Mélanges Nicole, var. contributors, JNicole Festschr. 1905, p. 246 [HvanHerwerden=PLips 40 III, 3 p. 129] λίθῳ δέδωκεν τῷ υἱῷ μου; Ps 27:4) Rv 2:23. Of taxes, tribute, rent, etc. τινὶ ἀπό τινος pay rent of someth. Lk 20:10 (cp. 1 Esdr 6:28). τὶ pay (up), give someth. Mt 16:26; 27:10; Mk 8:37; δ. κῆνσον, φόρον καίσαρι pay tax to the emperor (Jos., Bell. 2, 403) Mt 22:17; Mk 12:14; Lk 20:22. Of inheritance pay out a portion of property Lk 15:12.ⓑ as commercial t.t. for bookkeeping λόγον δ. render account (POxy 1281, 9 [21 A.D.]; PStras 32, 9 δότω λόγον; cp. Phil 4:15) Ro 14:12.ⓒ of a bank deposit, equivalent to τιθέναι put, place, deposit ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν put money in the bank Lk 19:23.⑦ appoint to special responsibility, appoint (Num 14:4) κριτάς judges Ac 13:20; w. double acc. appoint someone someth. (PLille 28, II [III B.C.] αὐτοῖς ἐδώκαμεν μεσίτην Δωρίωνα) τοὺϚ μὲν ἀποστόλους some (to be) apostles Eph 4:11. τινὰ κεφαλήν make someone head 1:22. Also δ. τινὰ εἴς τι B 14:7 (Is 42:6).⑧ to cause someth. to happen, give (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 106 δ. χρόνον εἰς μετάνοιαν) δ. γνῶσιν σωτηρίας= to give (his people) knowledge of salvation = to tell (his people) how to be saved Lk 1:77.⑨ to bear as a natural product, yield, produce of a field and its crops καρπὸν δ. yield fruit (Ps 1:3) Mt 13:8; Mk 4:7f; fig. ἔδωκεν μοὶ Κύριος καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ GJs 6:3 (Pr 11:30).⑩ to dedicate oneself for some purpose or cause, give up, sacrifice τὸ σῶμά μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν διδόμενον my body, given up for you Lk 22:19 (cp. Thu. 2, 43, 2; Libanius, Declam. 24, 23 Förster οἱ ἐν Πύλαις ὑπὲρ ἐλευθερίας τ. Ἑλλήνων δεδωκότες τὰ σώματα; of Menas δ. ἀπροφασίστως ἑαυτόν ‘gave of himself unstintingly’ OGI 339, 19f; Danker, Benefactor 321–23; for use of δ. in a testamentary context cp. Diog. L. 5, 72); ἑαυτὸν (τὴν ψυχὴν) δ. give oneself up, sacrifice oneself (ref. in Nägeli 56; 1 Macc 6:44; 2:50) w. dat. 2 Cor 8:5. λύτρον ἀντι πολλῶν give oneself up as a ransom for many Mt 20:28; Mk 10:45 (ἀντί 3). Also ἀντίλυτρον ὑπέρ τινος 1 Ti 2:6. ὐπέρ τινος for or because of a person or thing J 10:15 v.l.; Gal 1:4; Tit 2:14; AcPl Ha 8, 24 (on the form of these passages s. KRomaniuk, NovT 5, ’62, 55–76). ἑαυτὸν δ. τῷ θανάτῳ ISm 4:2 (cp. Just., A I, 21, 2 πυρί); δ. ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θηρίον face the beast Hv 4, 1, 8.⑪ to cause (oneself) to go, go, venture somewhere (cp. our older ‘betake oneself’) (Polyb. 5, 14, 9; Diod S 5, 59, 4; 14, 81, 2; Jos., Ant. 7, 225; 15, 244) εἰς τὸ θέατρον Ac 19:31; εἰς τὴν ἔρημον GJs 1:4.⑫ to use an oracular device, draw/cast lots Ac 1:26.⑬ to grant by formal action, grant, allow, freq. of God (cp. 7 above) ἐξουσίαν δ. (Hippol., Ref. 5, 26, 21 grant someone the power or authority, give someone the right, etc. (cp. TestJob 20:3; Jos., Ant. 2, 90, Vi. 71) Mt 9:8; 28:18; 2 Cor 13:10; Rv 9:3; 1 Cl 61:1; τοῦ πατεῖν ἐπάνω τινός tread on someth. Lk 10:19. τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ γράψαι τὴν ἱστορίαν ταύτην the ability to write this account GJs 25:1. ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς δύναμιν καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἐπί Lk 9:1 (cp. Just., D. 30, 3 ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ δύναμιν). ταῦτά σοι πάντα δώσω i.e. put them under your control Mt 4:9 of the devil. Simple δ. w. inf. (Appian, Liby. 19 §78 ἢν [=ἐὰν] ὁ θεὸς δῷ ἐπικρατῆσαι 106 §499) δέδοται it is given, granted to someone γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια to know the secrets Mt 13:11; cp. ἡ δοθεῖσα αὐτῷ γνῶσις B 9:8 (Just., D. 7, 3 εἰ μή τῳ θεός δῷ συνιέναι) ἔδωκεν ζωὴν ἔχειν he has granted (the privilege) of having life J 5:26. μετὰ παρρησίας λαλεῖν to speak courageously Ac 4:29 and oft. Rather freq. the inf. is to be supplied fr. the context (Himerius, Or. 38 [4], 8 εἰ θεὸς διδοίη=if God permits) οἷς δέδοται sc. χωρεῖν Mt 19:11. ἦν δεδομένον σοι sc. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν J 19:11. W. acc. and inf. foll. (Appian, Mithrid. 11, §37; Heliodorus 5, 12, 2 δώσεις με πιστεύειν) οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν you will not permit your holy one to see corruption Ac 2:27; 13:35 (both Ps 15:10). ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι granted that he should be plainly seen 10:40. δὸς … ῥαγήναι τὰ δέσμα grant that our chains be broken AcPl Ha 3,11f. Pregnant constr.: grant, order (Diod S 9, 12, 2 διδ. λαβεῖν=permit to; 19, 85, 3 τὶ=someth.; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 125 §524 ὁ καιρὸς ἐδίδου=the opportunity permitted; Biogr. p. 130 ἐδίδου θάπτειν τ. ἄνδρα) ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἵνα μὴ ἀποκτείνωσιν orders were given them not to kill Rv 9:5; cp. 19:8.—Of an oath w. double inf. Lk 1:73f. S. also 17 below.⑮ give up, someth. that has been under one’s control for a relatively long time, give up, give back ἡ θάλασσα τ. νεκρούς the sea gave up its dead Rv 20:13.⑯ to proffer someth., extend, offer χεῖρα hold out one’s hand (to someone) Ac 9:41 (cp. 1 Macc 6:58; 2 Macc 12:11; Jos., Bell. 6, 318). (τὸν) μαστὸν τῇ παῖδι GJs 5:2; 6:3.⑰ In many phrases this word relates to an activity or an abstract object, and with tr. freq. determined by the noun object; cp. 13 above.ⓐ of humans: of a plan conceived in a meeting give counsel or advice: δ. for ποιεῖν (cp. κατά A2b β and s. s.v. συμβούλιον), which is read by some mss., in συμβούλιον δ. conspired (against Jesus) Mk 3:6. ἀφορμὴν δ. give an occasion (for someth.) 2 Cor 5:12; Hm 4, 1, 11; μαρτυρίαν δ. give testimony 1 Cl 30:7; δ. τὸ μαρτύριον bear witness AcPl Ha 4, 28; γνώμην δ. give an opinion 1 Cor 7:25; 2 Cor 8:10; ἐγκοπὴν δ. cause a hindrance 1 Cor 9:12; ἐντολὴν δ. command, order J 11:57; 12:49; 1J 3:23; ἐντολὴν καινὴν δ. give a new commandment J 13:34; εὔσημον λόγον δ. speak plainly or intelligibly 1 Cor 14:9; παραγγελίαν δ. give an instruction 1 Th 4:2; δ. τὴν ἐν [κυρίῳ σφραγίδα] seal in the Lord AcPl Ha 11, 23 (restored after the Coptic); προσκοπὴν δ. put an obstacle in (someone’s) way 2 Cor 6:3; δ. ἐκδίκησιν take vengeance 2 Th 1:8; ῥάπισμα δ. τινί slap someone J 18:22; 19:3; σημεῖον δ. give a sign Mt 26:48; τόπον δ. τινί make room for someone (Plut., Gai. Gracch. 840 [13, 3]) Lk 14:9; fig. leave room for Ro 12:19 (cp. τόπος 4); Eph 4:27. ὑπόδειγμα δ. give an example J 13:15; φίλημα δ. τινί give someone a kiss Lk 7:45.—δὸς ἐργασίαν Lk 12:58 is prob. a Latinism=da operam take pains, make an effort (B-D-F §5, 3b note 9; Rob. 109), which nevertheless penetrated the popular speech (OGI 441, 109 [senatorial decree 81 B.C.]; POxy 742, 11 [colloq. letter 2 B.C.] δὸς ἐργασίαν; PMich 203, 7; 466, 33f [Trajan]; PGiss 11, 16 [118 A.D.]; PBrem 5, 8 [117/119 A.D.]).ⓑ esp. oft. of God (Hom. et al.) and Christ: give, grant, impose (of punishments etc.), send, of gifts, peace τινί τι Eph 4:8; 1 Cl 60:4; τινί τινος give someone some of a thing Rv 2:17. Also τινὶ ἔκ τινος 1J 4:13. τὶ εἴς τινα 1 Th 4:8 (Ezk 37:14); εἰς τὰς καρδίας put into the hearts Rv 17:17 (cp. X., Cyr. 8, 2, 20 δ. τινί τι εἰς ψυχήν). Also ἐν τ. καρδίαις δ. (cp. ἐν 3) 2 Cor 1:22; 8:16 (cp. Ezk 36:27). εἰς τὴν διάνοιαν Hb 8:10 (Jer 38: 33); ἐπὶ καρδίας Hb 10:16 (δ. ἐπί w. acc. as Jer 6:21, and s. Jer 38:33 ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν γράψω). W. ἵνα foll. grant that Mk 10:37.—The pass. occurs very oft. in this sense (Plut., Mor. 265d; 277e) Lk 8:10; Rv 6:4; 7:2; 13:7, 14f and oft. ἐκδίκησιν διδόναι τινί inflict punishment on someone 2 Th 1:8; βασανισμὸν καὶ πένθος δ. τινί send torment and grief upon someone Rv 18:7; ὄνομα δ. GJs 6:2, χάριν δ. (Jos., Bell. 7, 325) Js 4:6; 1 Pt 5:5 (both Pr 3:34); GJs 14:2; υἱοθεσίαν AcPl Ha 2, 28; 9,12; ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 2, 30f; μεγαλεῖα 6,13. W. gen. foll. over someone Mt 10:1; Mk 6:7; J 17:2.—B. 749. Schmidt, Syn. 193–203. DELG. M-M. TW. -
3 θεός
θεός, οῦ (Hom.+; Herm. Wr.; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph.) ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ (Pisidian ins [JHS 22, 1902, 355] θέ; PGM 4, 218 θεὲ θεῶν; 7, 529 κύριε θεὲ μέγιστε; 12, 120 κύριε θεέ; 13, 997; LXX [Thackeray 145; PKatz, Philo’s Bible ’50, 152f]; ApcMos 42; Jos., Ant. 14, 24 ὦ θεὲ βασιλεῦ τ. ὅλων; SibOr 13, 172 βασιλεῦ κόσμου θεέ) Mt 27:46, more frequently (s. 2 and 3c, h below) ὁ θεός (LXX; ParJer 6:12; ApcEsdr 7:5; ApcMos 32; B-D-F §147, 3m; JWackernagel, Über einige antike Anredeformen 1912; Mlt-H. 120). On the inclusion or omission of the art. gener. s. W-S. §19, 13d; B-D-F §254, 1; 268, 2; Rob. 758; 761; 780; 786; 795; Mlt-Turner 174; BWeiss, D. Gebr. des Artikels bei den Gottesnamen, StKr 84, 1911, 319–92; 503–38 (also published separately). The sg. article freq. suggests personal claim on a deity. ‘God, god’.① In the Gr-Rom. world the term θεός primarily refers to a transcendent being who exercises extraordinary control in human affairs or is responsible for bestowal of unusual benefits, deity, god, goddess (s. on θεά) Ac 28:6; 2 Th 2:4 (cp. SibOr 5, 34 ἰσάζων θεῷ αὐτόν; Ar. 4, 1 οὐκ εἰσὶ θεοί; Tat. 10, 1 θεὸς … κύκνος γίνεται …; Ath. 18, 3 θεός τις δισώματος); θεὸς Ῥαιφάν Ac 7:43 (Am 5:26; s. entry Ῥαιφάν). οὐδεὶς θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς there is no god but one 1 Cor 8:4 (cp. AcPl Ha 1, 17 restored). θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου Ac 12:22.—ἡ θεός the (female) god, goddess (Att., later more rarely; Peripl. Eryth. c. 58; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2; SIG 695, 28; ins, one of which refers to Artemis, in Hauser p. 81f; Jos., Ant. 9, 19; Ar. 11, 2 [Artemis]; Ath. 29, 2 [Ino]) Ac 19:37.—Pl. Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1). Cp. 14:11; 19:26; PtK 2 p. 14, 21. εἴπερ εἰσὶν λεγόμενοι θεοί even if there are so-called gods 1 Cor 8:5a; s. vs. 5b (on θεοὶ πολλοί cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 149.—Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a: θ. πολλοί w. εἷς θ. πατήρ). οἱ φύσει μὴ ὄντες θεοί those who by nature are not really gods Gal 4:8b (cp. Ar. 4, 2 μὴ εἶναι τὸν οὐρανὸν θεόν al.). θεοὶ … λίθινοι etc. AcPl Ha 1, 18 (cp. JosAs 10:13 τοὺς χρυσοῦς καὶ ἀργυροῦς). Of the devil μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15.② Some writings in our lit. use the word θ. w. ref. to Christ (without necessarily equating Christ with the Father, and therefore in harmony w. the Shema of Israel Dt 6:4; cp. Mk 10:18 and 4a below), though the interpretation of some of the pass. is in debate. In Mosaic and Gr-Rom. traditions the fundamental semantic component in the understanding of deity is the factor of performance, namely saviorhood or extraordinary contributions to one’s society. Dg. 10:6 defines the ancient perspective: ὸ̔ς ἃ παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ λάβων ἔχει, ταῦτα τοῖς ἐπιδεομένοις χορηγῶν, θεὸς γίνεται τῶν λαμβανάντων one who ministers to the needy what one has received from God proves to be a god to the recipients (cp. Sb III, 6263, 27f of a mother). Such understanding led to the extension of the mng. of θ. to pers. who elicit special reverence (cp. pass. under 4 below; a similar development can be observed in the use of σέβομαι and cognates). In Ro 9:5 the interpr. is complicated by demand of punctuation marks in printed texts. If a period is placed before ὁ ὢν κτλ., the doxology refers to God as defined in Israel (so EAbbot, JBL 1, 1881, 81–154; 3, 1883, 90–112; RLipsius; HHoltzmann, Ntl. Theol.2 II 1911, 99f; EGünther, StKr 73, 1900, 636–44; FBurkitt, JTS 5, 1904, 451–55; Jülicher; PFeine, Theol. d. NTs6 ’34, 176 et al.; RSV text; NRSV mg.). A special consideration in favor of this interpretation is the status assigned to Christ in 1 Cor 15:25–28 and the probability that Paul is not likely to have violated the injunction in Dt 5:7.—If a comma is used in the same place, the reference is to Christ (so BWeiss; EBröse, NKZ 10, 1899, 645–57 et al.; NRSV text; RSV mg. S. also εἰμί 1.—Undecided: THaering.—The transposition by the Socinian scholar JSchlichting [died 1661] ὧν ὁ=‘to whom belongs’ was revived by JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 363; WWrede, Pls 1905, 82; CStrömman, ZNW 8, 1907, 319f). In 2 Pt 1:1; 1J 5:20 the interpretation is open to question (but cp. ISmyrna McCabe.0010, 100 ὁ θεὸς καὶ σωτὴρ Ἀντίοχος). In any event, θ. certainly refers to Christ, as one who manifests primary characteristics of deity, in the foll. NT pass.: J 1:1b (w. ὁ θεός 1:1a, which refers to God in the monotheistic context of Israel’s tradition. On the problem raised by such attribution s. J 10:34 [cp. Ex 7:1; Ps 81:6]; on θεός w. and without the article, acc. to whether it means God or the Logos, s. Philo, Somn. 1, 229f; JGriffiths, ET 62, ’50/51, 314–16; BMetzger, ET 63, ’51/52, 125f), 18b. ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου my Lord and my God! (nom. w. art.=voc.; s. beg. of this entry.—On a resurrection as proof of divinity cp. Diog. L. 8, 41, who quotes Hermippus: Pythagoras returns from a journey to Hades and appears among his followers [εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν], and they consider him θεῖόν τινα) J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. 3c below). Tit 2:13 (μέγας θ.). Hb 1:8, 9 (in a quot. fr. Ps 44:7, 8). S. TGlasson, NTS 12, ’66, 270–72. Jd 5 P72. But above all Ignatius calls Christ θεός in many pass.: θεὸς Ἰησοῦς Χριστός ITr 7:1; Χριστὸς θεός ISm 10:1. ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν IEph ins; 15:3; 18:2; IRo ins (twice); 3:3; IPol 8:3; τὸ πάθος τοῦ θεοῦ μου IRo 6:3. ἐν αἵματι θεοῦ IEph 1:1. ἐν σαρκὶ γενόμενος θεός 7:2. θεὸς ἀνθρωπίνως φανερούμενος 19:3. θεὸς ὁ οὕτως ὑμᾶς σοφίσας ISm 1:1.—Hdb. exc. 193f; MRackl, Die Christologie d. hl. Ign. v. Ant. 1914. ὁ θεός μου Χριστὲ Ἰησοῦ AcPl Ha 3, 10; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ θ[εός] 6, 24; cp. ln. 34 (also cp. Just., A I, 63, 15, D. 63, 5 al.; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 24, 1; Mel., P. 4, 28 al.).—SLösch, Deitas Jesu u. antike Apotheose ’33. Cp. AWlosk, Römischer Kaiserkult ’78.③ God in Israelite/Christian monotheistic perspective, God the predom. use, somet. with, somet. without the art.ⓐ ὁ θεός Mt 1:23; 3:9; 5:8, 34; Mk 2:12; 10:18; 13:19 (cp. TestJob 37:4); Lk 2:13; J 3:2b; Ac 2:22b; Gal 2:6 al. With prep. εἰς τὸν θ. Ac 24:15. ἐκ τοῦ θ. J 8:42b, 47; 1J 3:9f; 4:1ff, 6f; 5:1, 4; 2 Cor 3:5; 5:18 al.; ἐν τῷ θ. Ro 5:11; Col 3:3 (Ath. 21, 1). ἔναντι τοῦ θ. Lk 1:8; ἐπὶ τὸν θ. Ac 15:19; 26:18, 20 (Just., D. 101, 1); ἐπὶ τῷ θ. Lk 1:47 (Just., D. 8, 2); παρὰ τοῦ θ. J 8:40 (Ar. 4, 2; Just., A I, 33, 6 al.; without art. Just., D. 69, 6 al.). παρὰ τῷ θ. Ro 2:13; 9:14 (Just., A I, 28, 3; Tat. 7, 1; Ath. 31, 2 al.); πρὸς τὸν θ. J 1:2; Ac 24:16; AcPl Ha 3, 8 (Just., D. 39, 1 al.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 13 al.); τὰ πρὸς τὸν θ. Hb 2:17; 5:1; Ro 15:17 is acc. of respect: with respect to one’s relation to God or the things pert. to God, in God’s cause (s. B-D-F §160; Rob. 486. For τὰ πρὸς τ. θ. s. Soph., Phil. 1441; X., De Rep. Lac. 13, 11; Aristot., Pol. 1314b, 39; Lucian, Pro Imag. 8; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 109, 3 [III B.C.] εὐσεβὴς τὰ πρὸς θεούς; Ex 4:16; 18:19; Jos., Ant. 9, 236 εὐσεβὴς τὰ πρὸς τ. θεόν). τὰ πρὸς τ[ὸν] θεὸν ἐτήρουσαν, when they were observant of matters pert. to God AcPl Ha 8, 13 (=τα π̣ρος θ̣̄ν̄| ἐτήρουσαν Ox 1602, 10f=BMM recto 16 restored after the preceding).ⓑ without the art. Mt 6:24; Lk 2:14; 20:38; J 1:18a; Ro 8:8, 33b; 2 Cor 1:21; 5:19; Gal 2:19; 4:8f; 2 Th 1:8; Tit 1:16; 3:8; Hb 3:4; AcPl Ha 8, 20=BMM recto 25 (s. also HSanders’ rev. of Ox 1602, 26, in HTR 31, ’38, 79, n. 2, Ghent 62 verso, 6); AcPlCor 1:15; 2:19, 26. W. prep. ἀπὸ θεοῦ J 3:2a; 16:30 (Just., A II, 13, 4 τὸν … ἀπὸ ἀγεννήτου … θεοῦ λόγον). εἰς θεόν IPhld 1:2. ἐκ θεοῦ (Pind., O. 11, 10, P. 1, 41; Jos., Ant. 2, 164; Just., A I, 22, 2; Mel., P. 55, 404) Ac 5:39; 2 Cor 5:1; Phil 3:9. ἐν θεῷ J 8:21; Ro 2:17; Jd 1; AcPl Ha 1, 15; 2, 35. ἐπὶ θεόν AcPl Ha 2, 29 (cp. πρὸς θεόν Just., D. 138, 2). κατὰ θεόν acc. to God’s will (Appian, Iber. 19 §73; 23 §88; 26 §101, Liby. 6 §25, Bell. Civ. 4, 86 §364) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9ff; IEph 2:1. ἡ κατὰ θ. ἀγάπη godly love IMg 1:1; cp. 13:1; ITr 1:2. παρὰ θεῷ (Jos., Bell. 1, 635) Mt 19:26; Lk 2:52.ⓒ w. gen. foll. or w. ἴδιος to denote a special relationship: ὁ θ. Ἀβραάμ Mt 22:32; Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37; Ac 3:13; 7:32 (all Ex 3:6). ὁ θ. (τοῦ) Ἰσραήλ (Ezk 44:2; JosAs 7:5) Mt 15:31; Lk 1:68; cp. Ac 13:17; 2 Cor 6:16; Hb 11:16. ὁ θ. μου Ro 1:8; 1 Cor 1:4; 2 Cor 12:21; Phil 1:3; 4:19; Phlm 4. OT κύριος ὁ θ. σου (ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτῶν) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29 (Dt 6:4); Lk 1:16; 4:8 (Dt 6:13); 10:27 (Dt 6:5); Ac 2:39. ὁ κύριος καὶ ὁ θ. ἡμῶν Rv 4:11 (Just., D. 12, 3; the combination of κύριος and θεός is freq. in the OT: 2 Km 7:28; 3 Km 18:39; Jer 38:18; Zech 13:9; Ps 29:3; 34:23; 85:15; 87:2; TestAbr A 3 p. 79, 19 [Stone p. 6]; JosAs 3:4; 12:2 κύριε ὁ θ. τῶν αἰώνων. But s. also Epict. 2, 16, 13 κύριε ὁ θεός [GBreithaupt, Her. 62, 1927, 253–55], Herm. Wr.: Cat. Cod. Astr. VIII/2, p. 172, 6 κύριε ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν, the PGM ref. at the beg. of this entry, and the sacral uses τ. θεῷ κ. κυρίῳ Σοκνοπαίῳ [OGI 655, 3f—24 B.C.]; PTebt 284, 6; τῷ κυρίῳ θεῷ Ἀσκληπίῳ [Sb 159, 2]; deo domino Saturno [ins fr. imperial times fr. Thala in the prov. of Africa: BPhW 21, 1901, 475], also Suetonius, Domit. 13 dominus et deus noster [for the formulation s. 4a: PMich 209]; Ar. 15, 10; Just., D. 60, 3 al.) τὸν ἴδιον θ. AcPl Ha 3, 22.—ὁ θ. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χ. Eph 1:17.ⓓ used w. πατήρ (s. πατήρ 6a) ὁ θ. καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ Ro 15:6; 2 Cor 1:3; Eph 1:3; Col 1:3; 1 Pt 1:3. ὁ θ. καὶ πατὴρ ἡμῶν Gal 1:4; Phil 4:20; 1 Th 1:3; 3:11, 13. ὁ θ. καὶ πατήρ 1 Cor 15:24; Eph 5:20; Js 1:27. θ. πατήρ Phil 2:11; 1 Pt 1:2; cp. 1 Cor 8:6. ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ro 1:7b; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; Phlm 3; ἀπὸ θ. π. Gal 1:3 v.l.; Eph 6:23; 2 Th 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; παρὰ θεοῦ π. 2 Pt 1:17; 2J 3.ⓔ w. gen. of what God brings about, in accordance w. the divine nature: ὁ θ. τῆς εἰρήνης Ro 15:33; 1 Th 5:23. τῆς ἐλπίδος the God fr. whom hope comes Ro 15:13. πάσης παρακλήσεως 2 Cor 1:3b. ὁ θ. τῆς ἀγάπης 13:11. ὁ θ. πάσης χάριτος 1 Pt 5:10. In οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ θεός 1 Cor 14:33, θεός is to be supplied before ἀκατ.: for God is not a God of disorder.ⓕ The gen. (τοῦ) θεοῦ isα. subj. gen., extremely freq. depending on words like βασιλεία, δόξα, θέλημα, ἐντολή, εὐαγγέλιον, λόγος, ναός, οἶκος, πνεῦμα, υἱός, υἱοί, τέκνα and many others. Here prob. (s. β) belongs τὸ μωρὸν τ. θ. the (seeming) foolishness of G. 1 Cor 1:25 (s. B-D-F §263, 2).β. obj. gen. ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ θ. love for God Lk 11:42; J 5:42; ἡ προσευχὴ τοῦ θ. prayer to God Lk 6:12. πίστις θεοῦ faith in God Mk 11:22. φόβος θεοῦ fear of, reverence for God Ro 3:18 al. (s. φόβος 2bα) If 1 Cor 1:25 is to be placed here (s. α above), τὸ μωρὸν τ. θ. refers to apostolic allegiance to God, which is viewed by outsiders as folly.γ. τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ the things, ways, thoughts, or secret purposes of God 1 Cor 2:11. φρονεῖν τὰ τ. θ. Mt 16:23; Mk 8:33 s. φρονέω 2b (ἀτιμάζοντας τὰ τοῦ θ. Just., D. 78, 10 al.). ἀποδιδόναι τὰ τ. θ. τῷ θεῷ give God what belongs to God Mt 22:21; Mk 12:17; Lk 20:25.δ. Almost as a substitute for the adj. divine IMg 6:1f; 15 (cp. Ath. 21, 4 οὐδὲν ἔχων θεοῦ [of Zeus]).ⓖ The dat. τῷ θεῷ (s. B-D-F §188, 2; 192; Rob. 538f; WHavers, Untersuchungen z. Kasussyntax d. indogerm. Sprachen 1911, 162ff) isα. dat. of advantage (cp. e.g. Ath. 26, 3 ὡς ἐπηκόῳ θεῷ) for God 2 Cor 5:13. Perh. (s. β) ὅπλα δυνατὰ τῷ θ. 10:4. The dat. of Ro 6:10f rather expresses the possessor.β. ethical dat. in the sight of God, hence w. superl. force (s. Beginn. IV, 75, on Ac 7:20) very: μεγάλοι τῷ θ. B 8:4 (cp. Jon 3:3). ἀστεῖος τῷ θ. Ac 7:20. Perh. (s. α) ὅπλα δυνατὰ τ. θ. weapons powerful in the sight of God 2 Cor 10:4. This idea is usu. expressed by ἐνώπιον τοῦ θ.ⓗ ὁ θ. is used as a vocative Mk 15:34 (Ps 21:2. θεός twice at the beginning of the invocation of a prayer: Ael. Dion. θ, 8; Paus. Attic. θ, 7 ‘θεὸς θεός’ ταῖς ἀρχαῖς ἐπέλεγον ἐπιφημιζόμενοι); Lk 18:11; Hb 1:8 (Ps 44:7; MHarris, TynBull 36, ’85, 129–62); 10:7 (Ps 39:9); AcPl Ha 3, 10; 5, 12; 31. S. also 2 and 3c and the beg. of this entry.ⓘ θ. τῶν αἰώνων s. αἰών 3 and 4; θ. αἰώνιος s. αἰώνιος 2; θ. ἀληθινός s. ἀληθινός 3b; εἷς ὁ θεός s. εἷς 2b; (ὁ) θ. (ὁ) ζῶν s. [ζάω] 1aε.—ὁ μόνος θεός the only God (4 Km 19:15, 19; Ps 85:10; Is 37:20; Da 3:45; Philo, Leg. All. 2, 1f; s. Norden, Agn. Th. 145) J 5:44 (some mss. lack τοῦ μόνου); 1 Ti 1:17.—ὁ μόνος ἀληθινὸς θ. (Demochares: 75 Fgm. 2 p. 135, 7 Jac. [in Athen. 6, 62, 253c] μόνος θ. ἀληθινός) J 17:3. cp. the sim. combinations w. μόνος θ. Ro 16:27; Jd 25. μόνος ὁ θεὸς μένει AcPl Ha 2, 27.—θ. σωτήρ s. σωτήρ 1.—OHoltzmann, D. chr. Gottesglaube, s. Vorgesch. u. Urgesch.1905; EvDobschütz, Rationales u. irrat. Denken über Gott im Urchristent.: StKr 95, 1924, 235–55; RHoffmann, D. Gottesbild Jesu ’34; PAlthaus, D. Bild Gottes b. Pls: ThBl 20, ’41, 81–92; Dodd 3–8; KRahner, Theos im NT: Bijdragen (Maastricht) 11, ’50, 212–36; 12, ’51, 24–52.④ that which is nontranscendent but considered worthy of special reverence or respect, god (Artem. 2, 69 p. 161, 17: γονεῖς and διδάσκαλοι are like gods; Simplicius in Epict. p. 85, 27 acc. to ancient Roman custom children had to call their parents θεοί; s. 2 above and note on σέβομαι).ⓐ of humans θεοί (as אֱלֹהִים) J 10:34f (Ps 81:6; humans are called θ. in the OT also Ex 7:1; 22:27; cp. Philo, Det. Pot. Insid. 161f, Somn. 1, 229, Mut. Nom. 128, Omn. Prob. Lib. 43, Mos. 1, 158, Decal. 120, Leg. All. 1, 40, Migr. Abr. 84). θ. γίνεται τῶν λαμβανόντων (a benefactor) proves to be a god to recipients Dg 10:6 (cp. Pliny, NH 2, 7, 18; s. 2 above, beg.—Aristot., Pol. 3, 8, 1, 1284a of the superior pers. as a god among humans; Arcesilaus [III B.C.] describes Crates and Polemo as θεοί τινες=‘a kind of gods’ [Diog. L. 4, 22]; Antiphanes says of the iambic poet Philoxenus: θεὸς ἐν ἀνθρώποισιν ἦν [Athen. 14, 50, 643d]; Diod S 1, 4, 7 and 5, 21, 2 of Caesar; for honors accorded Demetrius, s. IKertész, Bemerkungen zum Kult des Demetrios Poliorketes: Oikumene 2, ’78, 163–75 [lit.]; Dio Chrys. 30 [47], 5 Πυθαγόρας ἐτιμᾶτο ὡς θεός; Heliod. 4, 7, 8 σωτὴρ κ. θεός, addressed to a physician; BGU 1197, 1 [4 B.C.] a high official, and 1201, 1 [2 B.C.] a priest θεός and κύριος; PMich 209, 11f [II/III A.D.] οἶδας ἄδελφε, ὅτει οὐ μόνον ὧς ἀδελφόν σε ἔχω, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὡς πατέρα κ. κύριον κ. θεόν; Just., A I, 26, 2 [Σίμων] θεὸς ἐνομίσθη καὶ … ὡς θεὸς τετίμηται; Tat. 3, 2 μὴ θεὸς ὤν [Empedocles]; Ath. 30, 2 Ἀντίνους … ἔτυχε νομίζεσθαι θεός of benefactors in gener. AcJ 27 [Aa II/1, 166, 4]).—JEmerton, JTS 11, ’60, 329–32.ⓑ of the belly (=appetite) as the god of certain people Phil 3:19 (cp. Athen. 3, 97c γάστρων καὶ κοιλιοδαίμων. Also Eupolis Com. [V B.C.] Fgm. 172 K. [in Athen. 3, 100b]; on the use of θ. in ref. to impersonal entities [e.g. Eur., Cyclops 316 of wealth as a god] s. DDD 693f).⑤ of the devil ὁ θ. τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 2 Cor 4:4 (s. αἰών 2a and WMüllensiefen, StKr 95, 1924, 295–99).—668–99. RAC XI 1202–78; XII 81–154; B. 1464. LfgrE s.v. θεός col. 1001 (lit.). Schmidt, Syn. IV 1–21. DELG. M-M. TW. Sv. -
4 κύριος
1I. κύριος, ία, ιον(Pind. et al.; ins, pap) comp. κυριώτερος (Just., A II, 13, 3); superl. κυριώτατος (Just., D. 11, 2); adv. κυρίως. The primary mng. relates to possession of power or authority, in various senses: ‘strong, authoritative, valid, ruling’; then to that which is preeminently important principal, essential (Aeschyl. et al.; 4 Macc 1:19; Jos., Ant. 20, 41, C. Ap. 1, 19; 2, 177; Just.; Ath. 22:2) τὸ δὲ κυριώτερον but what is more important IMg 1:2 (cp. Diog. L. 4, 26 ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ=quite definitely).—DELG.2II. κύριος, ου, ὁ (the masc. form of the subst. adj. κύριος [s. I], Aeschyl.+; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §385 [=ὁ τὸ κῦρος ἔχων]; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr.; Philo, Joseph., apolog.; loanw. in rabb. For the corresp. fem. s. κυρία.) gener. ‘lord, master’.① one who is in charge by virtue of possession, owner (X., Symp. 6, 1; Diod S 4, 15, 3; 14, 7, 6; ins, pap, LXX) κ. πάντων Gal 4:1 (Diod S 33, 7, 1; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 1, 13 p. 12, 10 of one who has come of age and controls his own property).ⓐ of things w. impers. obj. κ. τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος owner of the vineyard (cp. SIG 742, 6 κ. τῆς χώρας) Mt 20:8; 21:40; Mk 12:9; Lk 20:13, 15; ὁ κ. τῆς οἰκίας the master of the house (Ex 22:7; SIG 1215, 28; PTebt 5, 147 [118 B.C.] τοὺς κ. τῶν οἰκιῶν) Mk 13:35. Of a πῶλος: οἱ κ. αὐτοῦ its owners (PHib 34, 3 a span of oxen; Ex 21:29 [αὐτοῦ=τοῦ ταύρου]) Lk 19:33 (ASouter, Exp. 8th ser., 8, 1914, 94f, in connection w. the pl. here and Ac 16:16, 19 thinks of the owners as man and wife; the pl. οἱ κύριοι has this mng. Diod S 34 + 35, Fgm. 2, 10 and 2, 37: a married couple who are slave-owners. On the other hand in the Syntipas collection of Aesop’s Fables 16 p. 534 P. οἱ κύριοι of a dog are a number of metalworkers. On Hebr. background for possible understanding of the pl. in the sing. sense ‘owner’, s. RButh, JBL 104, ’86, 680–85.). The mng. owner easily passes into that of lord, master, one who has full control of someth. (Diod S 5, 42, 5 θανάτου κύριοι=lords over [life and] death; 10, 17, 1 and 2 κ. τοῦ σώματος=master of one’s own body; Ptolem., Apotel. 3, 11, 10 ὁ κ. τῆς ζωῆς; PsSol 2:29 κ. γῆς καὶ θαλάσσης; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 67; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 200) ὁ κ. τοῦ θερισμοῦ the Lord of the harvest (Jos., Ant.4, 227 κύριος ἔστω τὰ φυτὰ καρποῦσθαι) Mt 9:38; Lk 10:2. κ. τοῦ σαββάτου Lord of the Sabbath Mt 12:8; Mk 2:28; Lk 6:5.ⓑ w. a personal obj.: opp. δοῦλος J 13:16; foll. by gen. of pers. (cp. Judg 19:11; Gen 24:36; TestSol 22:5; TestJob 7:9; TestGad 4:4; JosAs 4:14) Mt 10:24f; 18:31f; 24:48; Lk 12:36. ὁ κ. τοῦ δούλου Lk 12:46. Abs., though the sense is unmistakable (Diod S 8, 5, 3; ApcEsdr 3:14 p. 27, 27f Tdf.) 12:37, 42b; 14:23; J 15:15; cp. Ro 14:4a; Eph 6:9a; Col 4:1. Several masters of the same slave (Billerb. I 430.—TestJos 14:2): δυσὶν κυρίοις δουλεύειν Mt 6:24; Ac 16:16, 19 (s. Souter under a above). κατὰ σάρκα designates more definitely the sphere in which the service-relation holds true οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κ. Eph 6:5; Col 3:22. As a form of address used by slaves κύριε Mt 13:27; 25:20, 22, 24; Lk 13:8; 14:22; 19:16, 18, 20, 25.② one who is in a position of authority, lord, masterⓐ of earthly beings, as a designation of any pers. of high position: of husband in contrast to wife 1 Pt 3:6 (Gen 18:12; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 15 [Stone p. 38]; ApcMos 2. cp. Plut., De Virt. Mul. 15 p. 252b; SIG 1189, 7; 1190, 5; 1234, 1); of a father by his son Mt 21:29 (cp. BGU 423, 2 Ἀπίων Ἐπιμάχῳ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ κυρίῳ; 818, 1; 28; Gen 31:35; by his daughter TestJob 46:2; JosAs 4:5); of an official in high position, by those who have dealings with him (cp. PFay 106, 15; 129, 1; 134, 2; BGU 648, 16) Mt 27:63. As a form of address to respected pers. gener.; here, as elsewhere, = our sir (as Mod. Gk.) Mt 25:11; J 12:21; 20:15 (but s. NWyatt, ZNW 81, ’90, 38); Ac 16:30; Rv 7:14 (cp. Epict. 3, 23, 11; 19; Gen 23:6; 44:18; TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 33 [Stone p. 4]; JosAs 7:8 al.). The distinctive Gr-Rom. view of ‘deified’ rulers requires treatment under 2bβ.ⓑ of transcendent beingsα. as a designation of God (for this custom, which has its roots in the Orient, s. the references in Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 95–98; Dssm., LO 298f [LAE 353ff]; s. also SEG XXXVI, 350 and add. ins cited by DZeller, DDD 918f; LXX (where it freq. replaces the name Yahweh in the Mt); pseudepigr.; Philo, Just.; Hippol. Ref. 8, 17, 1; Orig., C. Cels. 1, 35, 6.—FDoppler, D. Wort ‘Herr’ als Göttername im Griech.: Opusc. philol. v. kath. akad. Philologenverein in Wien I 1926, 42–47; MParca, ASP 31, ’91, 51 [lit.]) ὁ κ. Mt 5:33; Mk 5:19; Lk 1:6, 9, 28, 46; 2:15, 22; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 7:33; 8:24; Eph 6:7 (perh. w. ref. to Christ); 2 Th 3:3; 2 Ti 1:16, 18; Hb 8:2; Js 1:7; 4:15. Without the art. (on the inclusion or omission of the art. s. BWeiss [θεός, beg.]; B-D-F §254, 1; Mlt-Turner 174), like a personal name (οὐδένα κύριον ὀνομνάζουσι πλὴν τὸν θεόν Hippol. Ref. 9, 26, 2) Mt 27:10; Mk 13:20; Lk 1:17, 58; Ac 7:49; Hb 7:21 (Ps 109:4); 12:6 (Pr 3:12); 2 Pt 2:9; Jd 5 (θεὸς Χριστός P72); 9. ἄγγελος κυρίου (LXX, TestSol, GrBar et al.) Mt 1:20, 24; 2:13, 19; 28:2; Lk 1:11; 2:9a; J 5:3 v.l.; Ac 5:19; 7:30 v.l.; 8:26; 12:7, 23. δόξα κυρίου (Is 40:5; PsSol 5:19; 7:31; TestLevi 8:11; ApcMos 37) Lk 2:9b; δούλη κ. 1:38; ἡμέρα κ. Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4); νόμος κ. Lk 2:23f, 39; τὸ ὄνομα κ. Mt 21:9 (Ps 117:26; PsSol 6:1 al.); Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); πνεῦμα κ. Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39; τὸ ῥῆμα κ. 1 Pt 1:25 (Gen 15:1 al.); φωνὴ κ. (Gen 3:8 al.); Ac 7:31; χεὶρ κ. (Ex 9:3 al.; TestJob 26:4; ApcMos prol.) Lk 1:66. ὁ Χριστὸς κυρίου 2:26 (PsSol 17:32 [Χριστὸς κύριος, s. app.]).—W. the sphere of his lordship more definitely expressed (Diod S 3, 61, 5 Zeus is κ. τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; 6 θεὸς καὶ κ. εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; Jos., Ant. 20, 90 τῶν πάντων κ.; Just., D. 127, 2 κ. τῶν πάντων) κ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς (PGM 4, 640f; ParJer 5:32 [Harris]) Mt 11:25; Lk 10:21; cp. Ac 17:24. κ. τῶν κυριευόντων Lord of lords 1 Ti 6:15. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1:14; 2 Pt 3:15; Rv 11:15 (LXX; PsSol 10:5). Cp. 22:6 (s. Num 16:22; 27:16). κ. ὁ θεός Lk 1:32; Rv 1:8; with μου (σου, etc.) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16), 10 (Dt 6:13); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29f (Dt 6:4f); Lk 1:16 al. κ. ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1:68 (PsSol 16:3; TestSol 1:13). κ. ὁ θεὸς (ἡμῶν) ὁ παντοκράτωρ God, the (our) Lord, the Almighty Rv 4:8; 15:3; 16:7; 19:6; 21:22 (TestSol D 4:7; cp. ParJer 9:6). κ. Σαβαώθ Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9; TestSol 1:6 al.; Just., D. 64, 2); Js 5:4.—W. prep. ἐνώπιον τοῦ κυρίου Lk 1:15 (Ex 23:17; 1 Km 1:25 al.; TestJob 15:6 al.; TestReub 1:9 al.). παρὰ κυρίου Mt 21:42; Mk 12:11 (both Ps 117:23). παρὰ κυρίῳ 2 Pt 3:8. πρὸς τὸν κύριον Hs 9, 12, 6 (LXX; PsSol 1:1 al.).β. Closely connected w. the custom of applying the term κ. to deities is that of honoring (deified) rulers with the same title (exx. [2bα beg.] in Ltzm., op. cit.; Bousset 93; Dssm., 299ff [LAE 356]; FKattenbusch, Das apostol. Symbol II 1900, 605ff; KPrümm, Herrscherkult u. NT: Biblica 9, 1928, 3–25; 119–40; 289–301; JFears, RAC XIV, 1047–93; JvanHenten, 1341–52 [lit.]; cp. the attitude of the Lacedaemonians: φοβούμενοι τὸν ἕνα κ. αὐτῶν τὸν Λυκούργου νόμον=‘respecting their one and only lord, the law of Lycurgus’ Orig., C. Cels. 8, 6, 12). Fr. the time of Claudius (POxy. 37, 6; O. Wilck II 1038, 6) we find the Rom. emperors so designated in increasing measure; in isolated cases, even earlier (OGI 606, 1; on Augustus’ attitude s. DioCass. 51, 7f). Ac 25:26.—On deified rulers in gener. s. LCerfaux-JTondriau, Un concurrent du Christianisme: le culte des souverains dans la civilisation gréco-romaine ’57; FTaeger, Charisma, 2 vols. ’57–60; DRoloff, Göttlichkeit, Vergöttlichung und Erhöhung zu seligem Leben, ’70. S. esp. the collection of articles and reviews by various scholars, in Römischer Kaiserkult, ed. AWlosok ’78.γ. κύριος is also used in ref. to Jesus:א. in OT quotations, where it is understood of the Lord of the new community ἡ ὁδὸς κ. (Is 40:3) Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4; J 1:23. εἶπεν κύριος τ. κυρίῳ μου (Ps 109:1: the first κ. is God, the second Christ; s. Billerb. IV 452–65: Der 110. Ps. in d. altrabb. Lit.; βασιλεὺς αὐτῶν χριστὸς κ. [or κυρίου; s. 2bα] PsSol 17:32) Mt 22:44 (cp. vss. 43, 45); Mk 12:36 (cp. vs. 37); Lk 20:42 (cp. vs. 44); Ac 2:34. ὁ καυχώμενος ἐν κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Cor 1:31 (cp. Jer 9:22f). τὸ ὄνομα κυρίου Ro 10:13 (cp. Jo 3:5). σὺ κατʼ ἀρχάς, κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας Hb 1:10 (cp. Ps 101:26). εἰ ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ κύριος 1 Pt 2:3 (cp. Ps 33:9). 1 Pt 3:15 adds Χριστόν to κύριον ἁγιάσατε Is 8:13.ב. Apart from OT quots., Mt and Mk speak of Jesus as κύριος only in one pass. (words of Jesus himself) Mk 11:3=Mt 21:3 (but s. RBratcher, ET 64, ’52/53, 93; New Docs 1, 43; JDerrett, NovT 13, ’71, 241–58 on the public transport system; cp. Lk 19:31, 34), but they record that he was addressed as ‘Lord’ (κύριε), once in Mk (7:28) and more oft. in Mt, e.g. 8:2, 6, 8, 21, 25; 9:28; 14:28, 30; 15:22, 25, 27; 16:22 (also ApcSed 12:2).—Lk refers to Jesus much more frequently as ὁ κ. (Iren. 1, prol. 2 [Harv. I 4, 5] and 5, 26, 2 [Harv. II 396, 2]): 7:13; 10:1, 39 (Ἰησοῦ P75; τοῦ Ἰησοῦ P45 et al.), 41; 11:39; 12:42a; 13:15; 17:5f; 18:6; 19:8 al. The voc. κύριε is also found oft.: 5:8, 12; 9:54, 61; 10:17, 40; 11:1; 12:41 al.—In J the designation ὁ κ. occurs rarely, in the first 19 chapters only in passages that are text-critically uncertain (4:1 v.l.; 6:23, with omission in some mss.) or that have been suspected on other grounds (11:2); then 20:2, 18, 20, 25; cp. vss. 13, 28; 21:7ab, 12. On the other hand, κύριε in address is extraordinarily common throughout the whole book: 4:11, 15, 19, 49; 5:7; 6:34, 68 al. (more than 30 times).—In the long ending of Mk we have the designation ὁ κ. twice, 16:19, 20. In GPt ὁ κ. occurs 1:2; 2:3ab; 3:6, 8; 4:10; 5:19; 6:21, 24; 12:50ab; 14:59, 60 (in the last pass. without the art.); the fragment that has been preserved hardly affords any opportunity for the use of the voc. 2 Cl introduces apocryphal sayings of Jesus with λέγει ὁ κ. 5:2; λ. ὁ κ. ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ 8:5.—Repeated κύριε, κύριε Mt 7:21f; Lk 6:46; 2 Cl 4:2 (TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 26 [Stone p. 20]; ApcMos 25 p. 14, 1 Tdf.; s. KKöhler, StKr 88, 1915, 471–90).ג. Even in the passages already mentioned the use of the word κ. raises Jesus above the human level (Mani is also κ. for his people: Kephal. I 183, 11; 13; 16); this tendency becomes even clearer in the following places: ὁ κύριος Ac 5:14; 9:10f, 42; 11:23f; 22:10b; Ro 12:11; 14:8; 1 Cor 6:13f, 17; 7:10, 12; 2 Cor 5:6, 8; Gal 1:19; Col 1:10; 1 Th 4:15b; 2 Th 3:1; Hb 2:3; Js 5:7f; B 5:5; IEph 10:3; AcPl Ha 6, 21; 7, 5; 27; 8, 2; AcPlCor 1:6, 14.—Without the art. 1 Cor 4:4; 7:22b; 10:21ab; 2 Cor 12:1; 1 Th 4:15a; 2 Ti 2:24; AcPlCor 1:8. So esp. in combinations w. preps.: ἀπὸ κυρίου Col 3:24. κατὰ κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. παρὰ κυρίου Eph 6:8. πρὸς κύριον 2 Cor 3:16; AcPl Ha 6, 9. πρὸς τὸν κ. 8, 23. σὺν κυρίῳ 1 Th 4:17b. ὑπὸ κυρίου 1 Cor 7:25b; 2 Th 2:13. Esp. freq. is the Pauline formula ἐν κυρίῳ (lit. on ἐν 4c), which appears outside Paul’s letters only Rv 14:13; IPol 8:3; AcPl Ha 3, 23; AcPlCor 1:1, 16 (cp. Pol 1:1 ἐν κυρίῳ ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χριστῷ): 1 Cor 11:11; Phlm 16; πιστὸς ἐν κ. 1 Cor 4:17; cp. Eph 6:21; Hm 4, 1, 4; φῶς ἐν κ. Eph 5:8. ἡ σφραγίς μου τ. ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κ. 1 Cor 9:2. W. verbs: ἀσπάζεσθαι Ro 16:22 (GBahr, CBQ 28, ’66, 465f renders: in the service of my master, i.e. Paul); 1 Cor 16:19. ἐνδυναμοῦσθαι Eph 6:10. καλεῖσθαι 1 Cor 7:22a. καυχᾶσθαι 1:31. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12ab; μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. παραλαμβάνειν διακονίαν Col 4:17. πεποιθέναι εἴς τινα Gal 5:10. ἐπί τινα 2 Th 3:4; cp. Phil 1:14; 2:24. προί̈στασθαι 1 Th 5:12. προσδέχεσθαι Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. στήκειν 4:1; 1 Th 3:8. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν κ. 2 Cor 2:12.—W. διδάσκαλος J 13:13f. W. σωτήρ 2 Pt 3:2; cp. 1:11; 2:20 (Just., D. 39, 2). W. Χριστός Ac 2:36; cp. Χριστὸς κύριος (La 4:20; PsSol 17, 32 v.l. [GBeale, Christos Kyrios in PsSol 17:32—‘The Lord’s Anointed’ Reconsidered: NTS 31, ’85, 620–27]; PsSol 18 ins) Lk 2:11. ὁ κ. Χριστός AcPlCor 2:3. Esp. freq. are the formulas ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Ac 1:21; 4:33; 8:16; 11:20; 15:11; 16:31; 19:5, 13, 17; 20:24, 35; 21:13; 1 Cor 11:23; 16:23; 2 Cor 4:14; 11:31; Gal 6:17 v.l.; Eph 1:15; 1 Th 2:15; 4:2; 2 Th 1:7; 2:8; Phlm 5.—ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 11:17; 28:31; Ro 13:14; 2 Cor 13:13; Phil 4:23; 2 Th 3:6; Phlm 25; 1 Cl 21:6 (Ar. 15, 1). Without the art. mostly in introductions to letters Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; 6:23; Phil 1:2; 3:20; 1 Th 1:1; 2 Th 1:2, 12b; 1 Ti 5:21 v.l.; Js 1:1; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς κ. 2 Cor 4:5; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. Col 2:6. Χριστὸς ὁ κ. 2 Cl 9:5. In an appeal κύριε Ἰησοῦ (cp. Sb 8316, 5f κύριε Σάραπι; PGM 7, 331 κύριε Ἄνουβι) Ac 7:59; Rv 22:20. κύριε AcPl Ha 7:30f, 40.—W. gen. of pers. (in many places the mss. vary considerably in adding or omitting this gen.) ὁ κ. μου ISm 5:2. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 2 Ti 1:8; Hb 7:14; IPhld ins; ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Ac 20:21; 1 Cor 5:4; 2 Cor 1:14; 1 Th 2:19; 3:11, 13; 2 Th 1:8; Hb 13:20. Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1 Cor 9:1. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ro 16:18 (the only pass. in Paul without Ἰησοῦς). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 15:26; Ro 5:1, 11; 15:6, 30; 1 Cor 1:2, 7f, 10; 6:11 v.l.; 15:57; 2 Cor 1:3; 8:9; Gal 6:14, 18; Eph 1:3; 5:20; 6:24; Col 1:3; 1 Th 1:3; 5:9, 23, 28; 2 Th 2:1, 14, 16; 3:18; 1 Ti 6:3, 14; Js 2:1; 1 Pt 1:3; 2 Pt 1:8, 14, 16; Jd 4, 17, 21 (also TestSol 1:12 D). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ἰησοῦς AcPlCor 2:5; cp. AcPl Ha 8, 17=Ox 1602, 20f/BMM recto 22. Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 1:4; 5:21; 7:25; 1 Cor 1:9; Jd 25 (Just., D. 41, 4). (ὁ) Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 6:11 v.l., 23; 8:39; 1 Cor 15:31; Eph 3:11; 1 Ti 1:2, 12; 2 Ti 1:2 (ὁ ἡμέτερος κ. Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς Just., D. 32, 3 and 47, 5 al.). Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. μου Phil 3:8. ὁ κ. μου Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς AcPl Ha 7, 29. ὁ κ. αὐτῶν Rv 11:8.—W. other genitives: πάντων κ. Lord over all (cp. Pind., I. 5, 53 Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κ.; Plut., Mor. 355e Osiris; PGM 13, 202) Ac 10:36; Ro 10:12. κ. κυρίων (cp. En 9:4) Rv 17:14; 19:16.—That ‘Jesus is κύριο’ (perh. ‘our κύριος is Jesus’) is the confession of the (Pauline) Christian church: Ro 10:9; 1 Cor 12:3; cp. 8:6; Phil 2:11 (on the latter pass. s. under ἁρπαγμός and κενόω 1. Cp. also Diod S 5, 72, 1: after Zeus was raised ἐκ γῆς εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, there arose in the ψυχαῖς of all those who had experienced his benefactions, the belief ὡς ἁπάντων τῶν γινομένων κατὰ οὐρανὸν οὗτος εἴη κύριος; s. also 3, 61, 6 Zeus acclaimed ‘God and Lord’).—In J the confession takes the form ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. θεός, beg., and 3c).—JFitzmyer, The Semitic Background of the NT Kyrios-Title: A Wandering Aramaean—Collected Aramaic Essays ’79, 115–42; s. also 87–90.δ. In some places it is not clear whether God or Christ is meant, cp. Ac 9:31; 1 Cor 4:19; 7:17; 2 Cor 8:21; Col 3:22b; 1 Th 4:6; 2 Th 3:16 al.ε. of other transcendent beingsא. an angel Ac 10:4 (JosAs 14:6 al.; GrBar 4:1 al.; ApcZeph). p. 129 Denis.ב. in contrast to the one κύριος of the Christians there are θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί many gods and many lords 1 Cor 8:5 (cp. Dt 10:17); we cannot say just what difference, if any, Paul makes betw. these θεοί and κύριοι; unless we have here an hendiadys, the apostle may imply that the κ. are of lower rank than the θ. (sim. Did., Gen. 248, 5. On the many θεοί and lesser divinities cp. Maximus Tyr. 11, 5ab θεὸς εἷς πάντων βασιλεὺς κ. πατήρ, κ. θεοὶ πολλοί, θεοῦ παῖδες [= δαίμονες 11, 12a], συνάρχοντες θεοῦ. Ταῦτα κ. ὁ Ἕλλην λέγει, κ. ὁ βάρβαρος; 8, 8ef. Also Diog. L. 8, 23 the saying of Pythagoras, that humankind must τοὺς θεοὺς δαιμόνων προτιμᾶν=honor the deities more than the divinities or demi-gods δαίμονες; Heraclitus, Fgm. 5 divides the celestial realm into θεοὶ καὶ ἥρωες. S. also κυριότης 3 and, in a way, PGM 36, 246 κύριοι ἄγγελοι; s. also θεός 1).—On the whole word s. WGraf Baudissin, Kyrios als Gottesname im Judentum u. s. Stelle in d. Religionsgesch., 4 vols. 1926–29; SvenHerner, Die Anwendung d. Wortes κ. im NT 1903; Dssm., LO 298ff [LAE 353ff]; BBacon, Jesus as Lord: HTR 4, 1911, 204–28; WHeitmüller, ZNW 13, 1912, 333ff; HBöhlig, D. Geisteskultur v. Tarsos 1913, 53ff, Zum Begriff κύριος bei Pls: ZNW 14, 1913, 23ff, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 170ff; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921 [Engl. tr. JSteely ’70]; PWern-le, ZTK 25, 1915, 1–92; PAlthaus, NKZ 26, 1915, 439ff; 513ff; Heitmüller, ZTK 25, 1915, 156ff; Bousset, Jesus der Herr 1916; GVos, The Continuity of the Kyrios Title in the NT: PTR 13, 1915, 161–89, The Kyrios Christos Controversy: ibid. 15, 1917, 21–89; EWeber, Zum Gebrauch der κύριος-Bez.: NKZ 31, 1920, 254ff; ERohde, Gottesglaube u. Kyriosglaube bei Paulus: ZNW 22, 1923, 43ff; RSeeberg, D. Ursprung des Christenglaubens 1914; JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 351ff; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Burton, ICC Gal 1921, 399–404; WFoerster, Herr ist Jesus 1924; AFrövig, D. Kyriosglaube des NTs 1928; ELohmeyer, Kyr. Jesus 1928; EvDobschütz, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς: ZNW 30, ’31, 97–123 (lit.); OMichel, D. Christus des Pls: ZNW 32, ’33, 6–31; also 28, 1929, 324–33; Dodd 9–11; LCerfaux, ‘Kyrios’ dans les citations paul. de l’AT: ETL 20, ’43, 5–17; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 130–37; PÉLangevin, Jésus Seigneur ’67; IPotterie, BRigaux Festschr. ’70, 117–46 (Luke); JKingsbury, JBL 94, ’75, 246–55 (Mt); FDanker, Luke ’87, 60–81; DZeller, 925–28 (lit.).—B. 1330. Schürer II 326. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv. -
5 ἔχω
ἔχω (A), [ per.] 2sg. ἔχεισθα cj. in Thgn. 1316 ( ἔχοισθα cod.), ἔχῃσθα cj. in Sapph.21 ( ἔχεισθα cod.); [ per.] 2sg. subj.Aἔχῃσθα Il.19.180
: [tense] impf. εἶχον, [dialect] Ep.ἔχον Od.2.22
, al., [dialect] Ion. and poet.ἔχεσκον Il.13.257
, Hdt.6.12, Epigr.Gr.988.6 ([place name] Balbilla): [tense] fut. ἕξω, [dialect] Ep. inf.ἑξέμεναι Call.Aet.3.1.27
(of duration) or σχήσω (of momentary action, esp. in sense check, v. infr. A. 11.9, not found in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. or NT); [ per.] 2sg. codd.: [tense] aor. 1 ἔσχης α f.l.in Nonn.D.17.177, alsoἔσχα IG3.1363.6
, 14.1728, [ per.] 3pl. μετ-έσχαν ib.12(7).271.12 (Amorgos, iii A.D.): [tense] aor. 2 ἔσχον, imper. , E.Hipp. 1353 (anap.) ( σχέ only in Orac. ap. Sch.E.Ph. 638 (dub.l.), sts. in compds. in codd., as , ); subj.σχῶ Il.21.309
, etc.; opt.σχοίην Isoc. 1.45
, in compds. σχοῖμι (asμετάσχοιμι S.OC 1484
(lyr.),κατάσχοιμεν Th.6.11
); [ per.] 3pl.σχοίησαν Hyp.Eux.32
,σχοῖεν Th.6.33
; inf.σχεῖν Il. 16.520
, etc., [dialect] Ep.σχέμεν 8.254
(in Alexandr. Gr. [ per.] 3pl. [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. 2εἴχοσαν AP5.208
(Posidipp. or Asclep.), v.l. in Ev.Jo.15.22,ἔσχοσαν Scymn.695
): for the poet. form ἔσχεθον, v. Σχέθω: [tense] pf. , εἴσχηκα in Inscrr. of iii/i B.C., SIG679.54, etc.; [dialect] Ep. ὄχωκα is dub., v. συνόχωκα:—[voice] Med., [tense] impf.εἰχόμην Pi.P.4.244
, etc.: [tense] fut.ἕξομαι Il.9.102
, etc.; σχήσομαι ib. 235, Ar.Av. 1335, more freq. in compds. ( ἀνα-) A.Th. 252, ( παρα-) Lys.9.8, etc.: [tense] pf. [voice] Pass. παρ-έσχημαι in med. sense, X.An.7.6.11, etc.: [tense] aor. 2ἐσχόμην Hom.
, Hdt.6.85, rare in [dialect] Att. exc. in compds.; imper.σχέο Il.21.379
,σχέσθε 22.416
, later σχοῦ in compds. ( ἀνά- ) E. lon947, etc.; inf.σχέσθαι Od.4.422
, Hes.Fr.79:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. [voice] Med. ἐν-έξομαι in pass. sense, E.Or. 516, D.51.11, laterσχεθήσομαι Gal.UP15.3
, freq. in compds. (συ- ) Phld.Ir.p.83 W., (ἐν- ) Plu.2.98 of, ( ἐπι-) S.E.P.1.186: [tense] aor. 1ἐσχέθην Arr.An.5.7.4
, 6.11.2, Aret.SA2.5, (κατ-, συν-) Plu.Sol. 21, Hp.Int. 45 vulg.: [tense] fut. [voice] Med. σχήσομαι in pass. sense, Il.9.235 (dub.), 655, 13.630: [tense] aor. 2 [voice] Med. in pass. sense,ἐσχόμην Il.17.696
, al., Hdt. 1.31 (σχέτο Il.7.248
, 21.345), part.σχόμενος Od.11.279
, prob. in Isoc.19.11, ( κατα-) Pi.P.1.10, Pl.Phdr. 244e, Parth.33.2 (s.v.l.): [tense] pf.ἔσχημαι Paus.4.21.2
; also in compds., freq. written - ίσχημαι, -ήσχημαι in codd. of late authors. (I.-E. seĝh- (cf. Skt. sáhate 'overpower', Goth. sigis 'victory', Gr. ἔχ- dissim. fr. ἔχ-), reduced form sĝh-(σχ-), whence redupl. ἴσχω ( = si-sĝh-o) (q.v.): cf. ἕκ-τωρ, ἕξω, ἕξις; but hέχ- IG12.374.161, al., is a mere error (ἔχ- ib.12.116.4, 16).)A Trans., have, hold:I possess, of property, the most common usage, Od.2.336, 16.386, etc.; οἵ τι ἔχοντες the propertied class, Hdt.6.22; ὁ ἔχων a wealthy man, S.Aj. 157 (anap.);οἱ ἔχοντες E.Alc.57
, Ar.Eq. 1295, Pl. 596; οἱ οὐκ ἔχοντες the poor, E.Supp. 240;κακὸν τὸ μὴ 'χειν Id.Ph. 405
; ἔχειν χρέα to have debts due to one, D. 36.41, cf. 37.12; to have received,θεῶν ἄπο κάλλος ἐ. h.Ven.77
;τι ἔκ τινος S.OC 1618
;παρά τινος Id.Aj. 663
;πρός τινος X.An.7.6.33
, etc.;ὑπὸ.. θεοῖσι h.Ap. 191
; πλέον, ἔλασσον ἔ.. (v. h. vv.): in [tense] aor., acquire, get, : also [tense] fut.σχήσω, δύναμιν Th.6.6
;λέχος E.Hel.30
, cf. Pi.P.9.116:—[voice] Pass., to be possessed,ἔντεα.. μετὰ Τρώεσσιν ἔχονται Il.18.130
, cf. 197.2 keep, have charge of,ἔχον πατρώϊα ἔργα Od. 2.22
;κῆπον 4.737
;Εἰλείθυιαι.. ὠδῖνας ἔχουσαι Il.11.271
;πύλαι.., ἃς ἔχον Ὧραι 5.749
, 8.393;τὰς ἀγέλας X.Cyr.7.3.7
; διαιτητῶν ἐχόντων τὰς δίκας having control of, D.47.45; to be engaged in, φυλακὰς ἔχον kept watch, Il.9.1, 471;σκοπιὴν ἔχεν Od.8.302
;ἀλαοσκοπιὴν εἶχε Il. 10.515
, 13.10; σκοπιὴν ἔ. τινός for a thing, Hdt.5.13;δυσμενῶν θήραν ἔχων S.Aj. 564
, etc.; ἐν χερσὶν ἔ. τι (v. χείρ).b metaph., of a patient, οὐκ ἔχει ἑωυτόν is not himself, Hp.Int.49.3 c. acc. loci, inhabit,οὐρανόν Il.21.267
;Ὄλυμπον 5.890
; haunt, [Νύμφαι] ἔχουσ' ὀρέων αἰπεινὰ κάρηνα Od.6.123
;Βρόμιος ἔχει τὸν χῶρον A.Eu.24
; esp. of tutelary gods and heroes, Th.2.74, X.Cyr.8.3.24; of men,πόλιν καὶ γαῖαν Od.6.177
, 195, etc.; Θήβας ἔσχον ( ἔσχεν codd.) ruled it, E.HF 4; ἔχεις γὰρ χῶρον occupiest it, S.OC37, cf. Od.23.46; in military sense, ἔ. τὸ δεξιόν (with or without κέρας) Th.3.107, X.An.2.1.15; of beasts,τὰ ὄρη ἔ. Id.Cyn.5.12
.4 have to wife or as husband (usu. without γυναῖκα, ἄνδρα), οὕνεκ' ἔχεις Ἑλένην καί σφιν γαμβρὸς Διός ἐσσι Od. 4.569
, cf.7.313, Il.3.53, etc.;ἔσχε ἄλλην ἀδελφεήν Hdt.3.31
, cf. Th.2.29;νυμφίον Call.Aet.3.1.27
; also of a lover, Th.6.54, AP5.185 (Posidipp.), etc.;ἔχω Λαΐδα, ἀλλ' οὐκ ἔχομαι Aristipp.
ap. D.L.2.75, cf. Ath. 12.544d:—in [voice] Pass.,τοῦ περ θυγάτηρ ἔχεθ' Ἕκτορι Il.6.398
.6 [tense] pres. part. with Verbs, almost, = with,ἤϊε ἔχων ταῦτα Hdt.3.128
, cf. 2.115;ὃς ἂν ἥκῃ ἔχων στρατόν Id.7.8
.δ', cf. X.Cyr.1.6.10.—Prose use.7 of Place, ἐπ' ἀριστερὰ ἔ. τι keep it on one's left, i.e. to keep to the right of it, Od.3.171;ἐπ' ἀριστερὰ χειρὸς ἔ. 5.277
; ἐν δεξιᾷ, ἐν ἀριστερᾷ ἔ., Th.3.106; τοὺς οἰκέτας ὑστάτους ἔ. X.Cyr.4.2.2: but in [tense] aor., get,περιπλώοντες τὴν Λιβύην τὸν ἥλιον ἔσχον ἐς τὰ δεξιά Hdt.4.42
.8 of Habits, States, or Conditions, bodily or mental,γῆρας λυγρὸν ἔ Od.24.250
;ἀνεκτὸν ἔχει κακόν 20.83
;ἕλκος Il.16.517
;λύσσαν 9.305
;μάχην ἔ. 14.57
;ἀρετῆς πέρι δῆριν ἔ. Od.24.515
; ὕβριν ἔ. indulge in.., 1.368, etc.; [ Ἀφροδίτην] 22.445; [φρένας] ἔ. Il.13.394
, etc.;βουλήν 2.344
;τλήμονα θυμόν 5.670
; , cf. Od.14.490 (for later senses of νοῦν ἔχειν, v. νοῦς); ἄλγεα Il.5.895
, etc.;ἄχεα θυμῷ 3.412
;πένθος μετὰ φρεσίν 24.105
;πένθος φρεσίν Od.7.219
;πόνον.. καὶ ὀϊζύν Il.13.2
, Od.8.529;οὐδὲν βίαιον Hdt.3.15
;πρήγματα ἔ. Id.7.147
, cf. Pl.Tht. 174b, etc.: in periphrastic phrases, ποθὴν ἔ. τινός, = ποθεῖν, Il.6.362; ἐπιδευὲς ἔ. τινός, = ἐπιδεύεσθαι, 19.180; ἔ. τέλος, = τελεῖσθαι, 18.378; κότον ἔ. τινί, = κοτεῖσθαι, 13.517;ἐπιθυμίαν τινός E.Andr. 1281
;φροντίδα τινός Id.Med. 1301
; ἡσυχίην ἔ. keep quiet, Hdt.2.45, etc. ([tense] fut.ἡσυχίαν ἕξειν D.47.29
, but οὐκ ἔσθ' ὅπως.. ἡ. σχήσει will not keep still for a moment, Id.1.14); αἰτίαν ἔ. to be accused, X.An.7.1.8;ὑπό τινος A.Eu.99
(but μομφὴν ἔ., = μέμφεσθαι, E.Or. 1069, A.Pr. 445): in [tense] aor., of entering upon a state, ἔσχεν χόλον conceived anger, B. 5.104; ἔχειν τι κατά τινος have something against somebody, Ev.Matt.5.23, Ev.Marc.11.25, Apoc.2.4;ἔχω τι πρός τινα Act.Ap.24.19
;ἔχειν πρός τινα 2 Ep.Cor.5.12
;ἕξει πρὸς τὸν Θεόν JRS14.85
([place name] Laodicea): —these phrases are freq. inverted,οὓς ἔχε γῆρας Il.18.515
;οὐδὲ Ποσειδάωνα γέλως ἔχε Od.8.344
;ἀμηχανίη δ' ἔχε θυμόν 9.295
;θάμβος δ' ἔχεν εἰσορόωντας Il.4.79
;σ' αὔτως κλέος ἐσθλὸν ἔχει 17.143
;Διὸς αἴσῃ, ἥ μ' ἕξει παρὰ νηυσί 9.609
(unless the antecedent is τιμῆς in 1.608);ὥς σφεας ἡσυχίη τῆς πολιορκίης ἔσχε Hdt.6.135
;ὄφρα με βίος ἔχῃ S.El. 225
(lyr.): c. dupl. acc.,φόβος μ' ἔχει φρένας A.Supp. 379
; also of external objects,αἴθρη ἔχει κορυφήν Od.12.76
;μιν ἔχεν μένος ἠελίοιο 10.160
;σε οἶνος ἔχει φρένας 18.331
; ἔχῃ βέλος ὀξὺ γυναῖκα, of a woman in travail, Il.11.269; λόγος ἔχει τινά c. inf., the story goes, that.., S.OC 1573 (lyr.); and so in later Gr., Plu.Dem.28, Ph. 1.331, Ael.VH3.14, NA5.42, Ath.13.592e;ὡς ἡ φάτις μιν ἔχει Hdt. 7.3
, cf. 5,26, 9.78 (but also ; [Κλεισθένης] λόγον ἔχει τὴν Πυθίην ἀναπεῖσαι Id.5.66
); ὡς ἂν λόγος ἔχῃ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι .. Plu.Alex.38:—[voice] Pass.,ἔχεσθαι κακότητι καὶ ἄλγεσι Od.8.182
;κωκυτῷ καὶ οἰμωγῇ Il.22.409
;ὀργῇ Hdt.1.141
;νούσῳ Hp.Epid.5.6
;ἀγρυπνίῃσι Hdt.3.129
;ὑπὸ πυρετοῦ Hp.Aph.4.34
;ὑπὸ τοῦ ὕδρωπος Id.Prorrh.2.6
,ἐν ἀπόρῳ Th.1.25
;ἐν συμφοραῖς Pl.R. 395e
.9 possess mentally, understand,ἵππων δμῆσιν Il.17.476
; ;πάντ' ἔχεις λόγον A. Ag. 582
, cf. E.Alc.51;ἔχετε τὸ πρᾶγμα S.Ph. 789
; ἔχεις τι; do you understand? Ar.Nu. 733: imper. ἔχε attend! listen! Pl.Alc.1.109b; ἔ. οὖν ib. 129b: with imper., ;ἔ. νυν, ἄλειψον Id.Eq. 490
; ἔχεις τοῦτο ἰσχυρῶς; Pl.Tht. 154a; know of a thing,μαντικῆς ὁδόν S.OT 311
; τινὰ σωτηρίαν; E.Or. 778 (troch.).10 keep up, maintain, καναχὴν ἔχε made a rattling noise, Il.16.105, 794; βοὴν ἔχον, of flutes and lyres, 18.495.11 involve, admit of, , cf. Th.1.5;βάσανον Lys.12.31
;ταῦτ' ἀπιστίαν, ταῦτ' ὀργὴν ἔχει D.10.44
; ἀγανάκτησιν, κατάμεμψιν, Th.2.41;τὰ ἀόρατα νοσήματα δυσχερεστέραν ἔχει τὴν θεραπείαν Onos. 1.15
.12 of Measure or Value,τὸ Δαμαρέτειον.. εἶχε Ἀττικὰς δραχμὰς δέκα D.S.11.26
;ἔχει τὸ Εὐβοϊκὸν τάλαντον Ἀλεξανδρείους δραχμὰς ἑπτακισχιλίας App.Sic.2.2
;χοῖρος ἔχων τὸ ὕψος δύο καὶ ἡμίσους πήχεων Ptol.Euerg.9
.b Geom., ἡ ἔχουσα τὰ κέντρα the (straight line) containing the centres, Archim.Aequil.1.6; ὁ κύκλος ἔχων τὸ πολύγωνον the circle containing (circumscribing) the polygon, Id.Sph.Cyl.1.23.13 c. dupl.acc.,Ὀρφέα ἄνακτ' ἔχειν E.Hipp. 953
;Ζῆν' ἔχειν ἐπώμοτον S.Tr. 1188
;παιδιὰν ἔ. τὸν ἐκείνου θάνατον Seleuc.
Alex. ap. Ath.4.155e.II hold:1 hold, ἔ. χερσίν, ἐν χερσίν, μετὰ χερσίν, etc., v. χείρ; μετὰ γαμφηλῇσιν ἔ. Il.13.200; πρόσθεν ἔ. ἀσπίδα ib. 157; ὑψοῦ, πασάων ὑπέρ, ὄπιθεν κάρη ἔ., 6.509, Od.6.107, Il. 23.136; ἔ. τινί τι to hold it for him, as his helper, 9.209, 13.600; uphold,οὐρανὸν.. κεφαλῇ τε καὶ ἀκαμάτῃσι χέρεσσι Hes.Th. 517
, 746; ἔχει δέ τε κίονας of Atlas, Od.1.53;ἐπ' ὤμων πατέρα S.Fr.
373.2 hold fast, χειρὸς ἔχων Μενέλαον holding him by the hand, Il.4.154, cf. 16.763, 11.488 (v. infr. C.I); ἔ. τινὰ μέσον grip one by the middle, of wrestlers, Ar.Nu. 1047;ἔχομαι μέσος Id.Ach. 571
, cf. Eq. 388, Ra. 469: metaph., ἔ. φρεσί keep in one's mind, Il.2.33;νῷ ἔ. τινά Pl.Euthphr.2b
, cf. R. 490a.3 of arms and clothes, bear, wear,εἷμα δ' ἔχ' ἀμφ' ὤμοισι Il.18.538
, cf. 595;παρδαλέην ὤμοισιν ἔ. 3.17
;σάκος ὤμῳ 14.376
;κυνέην κεφαλῇ Od.24.231
;τάδε εἵματ' ἔχω 17.24
, cf. 573, etc.;στολὴν ἀμφὶ σῶμα E.Hel. 554
, cf. X.Cyr.1.4.26, etc.; πολιὰς ἔχω I am grey-haired, Aeschin.1.49: abs., as a category, Arist.Cat. 2a3.4 of a woman, to be pregnant, Hdt.5.41, Hp.Epid.4.21, Arist.Pol. 1335b18; in fullἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. Hdt.3.32
; alsoπρὸς ἑωυτῇ ἔχειν Hp.Epid.1.26
.ιγ.b παῖδα ἔσχεν she had, i.e. bore, a child, Nic.Dam.11 J.7 enclose,φρένες ἧπαρ ἔχουσι Od.9.301
;σάρκας τε καὶ ὀστέα ἶνες ἔ. 11.219
;τοὺς δ' ἄκραντος ἔχει νύξ A.Ch.65
(lyr.); of places, contain,θηρῶν οὓς ὅδ' ἔχει χῶρος S.Ph. 1147
(lyr.), cf. X.Cyn.5.4; [τεῖχος] νῆας ἐντὸς ἔχον Il.12.8
;ὅσσους Κρήτη ἐντὸς ἔχει h.Ap.30
.8 hold or keep in a certain direction, ὀϊστὸν ἔχε aimed it, Il.23.871; more fullyχεῖράς τε καὶ ἔγχεα.. ἀντίον ἀλλήλων 5.569
; of horses or ships, guide, drive, steer, , cf. 11.760;φόβονδε 8.139
;τῇ ῥα.. ἔχον ἵππους 5.752
, etc.;παρὲξ ἔχε δίφρον Hes.Sc. 352
;ὅπῃ ἔσχες.. εὐεργέα νῆα Od.9.279
;παρὰ τὴν ἤπειρον ἔ. νέας Hdt.6.95
, etc.: abs., τῇ ῥ' ἔχε that way he held his course, Il.16.378, cf. 23.422; Πύλονδ' ἔχον I held on to Pylos, Od.3.182, cf. S.El. 720: metaph.,ἐπὶ ῥητορείαν ἔσχε Hsch.Mil.
(?)ap.Sch.Pl.R. 600c; also (esp. in [tense] fut. σχήσω, [tense] aor. 2 ἔσχον), put in, land,νέες ἔσχον ἐς τὴν Ἀργολίδα χώρην Hdt. 6.92
;σχεῖν πρὸς τὴν Σαλαμῖνα Id.8.40
; ἐς Φειάν, τῷ Δήλῳ, κατὰ τὸ Ποσειδώνιον, Th.2.25,3.29, 4.129;τάχ' οὖν τις ἄκων ἔσχε S.Ph. 305
; ποῖ σχήσειν δοκεῖς; Ar.Ra. 188; ἔχε.. ἀρὰν ἐπ' ἄλλοις point it against others, S.Ph. 1119 (lyr.); ὄμμ' ἔ. to turn or keep one's eye fixed, Id.Aj. 191 (lyr.);ἐπὶ ἔργῳ θυμὸν ἔ. Hes.Op. 445
;ἄλλοσ' ὄμμα θητέρᾳ δὲ νοῦν ἔ. S.Tr. 272
;τὸν δὲ νοῦν ἐκεῖσ' ἔχει E.Ph. 360
; δεῦρο νοῦν ἔχε attend to this, Id.Or. 1181; πρός τινα or πρός τι τὸν νοῦν ἔ., Th.3.22, 7.19; soπρός τινα τὴν γνώμην ἔ. Id.3.25
.9 hold in, stay, keep back,ἵππους Il.4.302
, 16.712; check, stop, [ τινα] 23.720, etc. ( σχήσω is usu. [tense] fut. in this sense, , cf. Il.11.820, Ar.Lys. 284, D.19.272, butἕξω Il.13.51
); χεῖρας ἔχων Ἀχιλῆος holding his hands, 18.33; but οὐ σχήσει χεῖρας will not stay his hands, Od.22.70; ἔ. [δάκρυον] 16.191; ἔ. ὀδύνας allay, assuage them, Il.11.848;ἔσχε κῦμα Od.5.451
;σιγῇ μῦθον 19.502
(soεἶχε σιγῇ καὶ ἔφραζε οὐδενί Hdt.9.93
);ἐν φρεσὶ μῦθον Od.15.445
; στόμα σῖγα, ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ, E.Hipp. 660, Fr.773.61 (lyr.); ; πόδα ἔξω or ἐκτός τινος ἔχειν, v. πούς:—[voice] Pass.,οὖρα σχεθέντα Aret.SA 2.5
.10 keep away from, c. gen.rei, τινὰ ἀγοράων, νεῶν, Il.2.275, 13.687; ; : c.inf.,ἦ τινα.. σχήσω ἀμυνέμεναι Il.17.182
; stop, hinder from doing,τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι X. An.3.5.11
, cf. HG4.8.5;ἔσχον μὴ κτανεῖν E.Andr. 686
, cf. Hdt.1.158, etc.;μὴ οὐ τάδ' ἐξειπεῖν E.Hipp. 658
; ὥστε μή .. X.An.3.5.11;τὸ μὴ ἀδικεῖν A.Eu. 691
, cf. Hdt.5.101: also c. part.,ἔ. τινὰ βουθυτοῦντα S.OC 888
(troch.); .11 keep back, withhold a thing,ὅς οἱ χρήματα εἶχε βίῃ Od.15.231
, cf. D.30.14;Ἕκτορ' ἔχει.. οὐδ' ἀπέλυσεν Il.24.115
, cf. 136; αὐτὸς ἔχε pray keep it, a civil form of declining, E.Cyc. 270.13 with predicate, keep in a condition or place,εἶχον ἀτρέμας σφέας αὐτούς Hdt.9.54
, cf. 53, Ar.Th. 230;ἔ. ἑωυτοὺς κατ' οἴκους Hdt.3.79
;σαυτὸν ἐκποδών A.Pr. 346
, cf. X.Cyr.6.1.37;σῖγα νάπη φύλλ' εἶχε E.Ba. 1085
;τοὺς στρατιώτας πολὺν χρόνον πειθομένους ἔ. X.Cyr.7.2.11
.14 hold, consider,τινὰ θέᾳ ἰκέλαν Sapph. Supp.25.3
(dub.), cf. E.Supp. 164;τινὰ ὡς προφήτην Ev.Matt.14.5
;τινὰ ὅτι προφήτης ἦν Ev.Marc.11.32
;ἔχε με παρῃτημένον Ev.Luc.14.18
, cf.POxy.292.6 (i A.D.).III c.inf., have means or power to do, to be able, c. [tense] aor. inf., Il.7.217, 16.110, etc.: c. [tense] pres. inf., Od.18.364, etc.;πόλλ' ἂν λέγειν ἔχοιμι S.Ph. 1047
: sts. with inf. omitted or supplied from context, ἀλλ' οὔ πως ἔτι εἶχε he could not, Il.17.354; οἷά κ' ἔχωμεν so far as we be able, Od.15.281;ἐξ οἵων ἔχω S.El. 1379
;ὅσον εἶχες E.IA 1452
; .b have to face, be obliged,παθεῖν Porph. Chr.63
;εἰ ἕξω βλαβῆναι Astramps.Orac.p.5
H.;βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι Ev.Luc.12.50
.2 after Hom., οὐκ ἔχω, folld. by a dependent clause, I know not..,οὐκ εἶχον τίς ἂν γενοίμαν A.Pr. 905
, cf. Isoc.12.130;οὐδ' ἔχω πῶς με χρὴ.. ἀφανίσαι S.OC 1710
;οὐκ ἔχων ὅ τι χρὴ λέγειν X.Cyr.1.4.24
;οὐκ ἔχω ποῖ πέσω S.Tr. 705
;ὅπως μολούμεθ' οὐκ ἔχω Id.OC 1743
; the two constructions combined,οὐ γὰρ εἴχομεν οὔτ' ἀντιφωνεῖν οὔθ' ὅπως.. πράξαιμεν Id.Ant. 270
.IV impers. c. acc., there is.. (as in Mod. Gr.),ἔχει δὲ φυλακτήριον πρὸς τὸ μή σε καταπεσεῖν PMag.Par.1.2505
, cf. 1262, 1840.B intrans., hold oneself, i.e. keep, so and so, ἔχον [οὕτως], ὥς τε τάλαντα γυνή (sc. ἔχει) kept balanced, like the scales which.., Il.12.433; ἕξω δ' ὡς ὅτε τις στερεὴ λίθος I will keep unmoved, as a stone.., Od.19.494, cf. Il.13.679, 24.27;νωλεμέως ἐχέμεν 5.492
; ἔγχος ἔχ' ἀτρέμας it kept still, 13.557; σχὲς οὗπερ εἶ keep where thou art, S.OC 1169;ἕξειν κατὰ χώραν Ar.Ra. 793
, cf. Hdt.6.42, X.Oec.10.10; διὰ φυλακῆς ἔχοντες to keep on their guard, Th.2.81; ἔχε ἠρέμα keep still, Pl.Cra. 399e, etc.; ἔχε δή stay now, Id.Prt. 349e, Grg. 460a, etc.;ἔχ' αὐτοῦ D.45.26
.64 with Preps., to be engaged or busy, (lyr.), X.An.5.2.26, etc.;περί τινας Id.HG7.4.28
.II simply, be,ἑκὰς εἶχον Od.12.435
;ἔ. κατ' οἴκους Hdt.6.39
;περὶ πολλῶν ἔ. πρηγμάτων Id.3.128
; ἀγῶνα διὰ πάσης ἀγωνίης ἔχοντα consisting in.., Id.2.91;ἔ. ἐν ἀνάγκαισι E.Ba. 88
(lyr.);ὅπου συμφορᾶς ἔχεις Id.El. 238
;ἐκποδὼν ἔχειν Id.IT 1226
, etc.2 freq. with Advbs. of manner,εὖ ἔχει Od.24.245
, etc.; καλῶς ἔχει, κακῶς ἔχει, it is, is going on well or ill, v. καλός, κακός (but [tense] fut. σχήσειν καλῶς will turn out well, D.1.9, cf. 18.45; ); οὕτως.. σχεῖν to turn out, happen thus, Pl.Ap. 39b; οὕτως ἔχει so the case stands, Ar.Pl. 110; οὕτως ἐχόντων, Lat. cum res ita se habeant, X.An.3.2.10;ὡς ὧδ' ἐχόντων S.Aj. 981
;οὕτω χρὴ διὰ στέρνων ἔχειν Id.Ant. 639
;οὕτως ἔ. περί τινος X.Mem.4.8.7
, cf. Hdt.6.16;πρός τι D. 9.45
;τῇδ' ἔ. S.Ph. 1336
;κοσμίως ἔ. Ar.Th. 854
;ἥδιον ἔ. πρός τινας D.9.63
; ὡς εἶχε just as he was, Hdt.1.114;ὥσπερ εἶχε Th.1.134
, X. HG4.1.30; ὡς ἔχω how I am, Ar.Lys. 610;ὥσπερ ἔχομεν Th.3.30
;τἀναντία εἶχεν D.9.41
; ἀσφαλέως, ἀναγκαίως ἔχει, = ἀσφαλές, ἀναγκαῖόν ἐστι, Hdt.1.86,9.27; καλῶς ἔχει no, I thank you, v. καλός.b c. gen. modi, εὖ ἔ. τινός to be well off for a thing, abound in it; καλῶς ἔ. μέθης to be well off for drink, i.e. to be pretty well drunk, Hdt. 5.20; σπόρου ἀνακῶς ἐ. to be busy with sowing, Id.8.109; εὖ ἐ. φρενῶν, σώματος, E.Hipp. 462, Pl.R. 404d;εὖ ὥρας ἔχον χωρίον Poll.5.108
; cf. ἥκω; so ὡς ποδῶν εἶχον as fast as they could go, Hdt.6.116, 9.59;ὡς τάχεος εἶχε ἕκαστος Id.8.107
;ὡς.. τις εὐνοίας ἢ μνήμης ἔχοι Th.1.22
;ὡς ὀργῆς ἔχω S.OT 345
, cf. E.Hel. 313, 857, etc.; πῶς ἔχεις δόξης; Pl.R. 456d;οὕτω τρόπου ἔχεις X.Cyr.7.5.56
;μετρίως ἔ. βίου Hdt.1.32
;ὑγιεινῶς ἔ. αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ καὶ σωφρόνως Pl.R. 571d
;οὐκ εὖ σεαυτοῦ τυγχάνεις ἔχων Philem.4.11
: also c. acc.,εὖ ἔ. τὸ σῶμα καὶ τὴν ψυχήν Pl.Grg. 464a
, cf. X.Oec.21.7: c. dat.,οὕτως ἐχόντων τούτων τῇ φύσει D.18.315
;πῶς ἔχετε ταῖς διανοίαις Lycurg.75
;τῇ λέξει κακῶς ἔ. Isoc.9.10
.3 lead towards,ὁδοὶ ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμὸν ἔ. Hdt.1.180
, cf. 191, 2.17; ἔ. εἴς τι to be directed, point towards,ἔχθρης ἐχούσης ἐς Ἀθηναίους Id.5.81
; τὸ ἐς τοὺς Ἀργείους ἔχον what concerns them, Id.6.19; ταῦτα ἐς τὴν ἀπόστασιν ἔχοντα ib.2, etc.; of Place, extend, reach to,ἐπ' ὅσον ἔποψις τοῦ ἱροῦ εἶχε Id.1.64
.IV after Hom., ἔχω as auxiliary, c. [tense] aor. part. giving a perfect sense,κρύψαντες ἔχουσι Hes.Op.42
;ἀποκληΐσας ἔχεις Hdt.1.37
;ἐγκλῄσασ' ἔχει Ar.Ec. 355
, cf. Th. 706; freq. in S.,θαυμάσας ἔχω OC 1140
, cf. Ant.22, al.: also in late Prose,ἀναλώσας ἔχεις Aristid. Or.18(20).1
;ὅς σφε νῦν ἀτιμάσας ἔχει E.Med.33
: less freq. c. [tense] pf. part., S.OT 701, Ph. 600, X.An.1.3.14,4.7.1: rarely c. [tense] pres. part., (lyr.), cf. X.Cyn.10.11.2 part. ἔχων, with [tense] pres., adds a notion of duration to that of present action, τί κυπτάζεις ἔ.; why do you keep poking about there? Ar.Nu. 509; τί δῆτα διατρίβεις ἔ.; why then keep wasting time? Id.Ec. 1151; τί γὰρ ἕστηκ' ἔ.; ib. 853, cf. Th. 473, 852: without interrog., φλυαρεῖς ἔ., ἔ. φλυαρεῖς, you keep chattering, Pl.Grg. 490e, Euthd. 295c;κακοῦν ἔχοντ' αὐτὸν ἀποκτιννύναι D.23.35
(and so possiblyἐνεργεῖ ἔ. Arist.Metaph. 1072b23
);παίσδεις ἔ. Theoc.14.8
: so in later Prose,παίζεις ἔ. Luc. Icar.24
; but ῥιπτεῖς ἔ.; do you throw away the prize when it is in your grasp? Aristid.1.443 J.C [voice] Med., hold oneself fast, cling closely,τῷ προσφὺς ἐχόμην Od. 12.433
, cf. Il.1.513, etc.;πρὸς ἀλλήλῃσιν Od.5.329
: mostly c. gen., hold on by, cling to, [ πέτρης] ib. 429;χερσὶν ἀώτου 9.435
;βρετέων A. Th.98
(lyr.);ἑξόμεσθάσου Ar.Pl. 101
; τῆς πληγῆς ἔχ εται claps his hand on the place struck, D.4.40.2 metaph., cleave, cling to,ἔργου Hdt. 8.11
, X.HG7.2.19; (iii A.D.);τῶν πραγμάτων Jul. Or.1.19a
; βιοτᾶς, ἐλπίδος, E. Ion 491, Fr. 409;τῆς αὐτῆς γνώμης Th.1.140
; lay hold on, take advantage of,τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο Thgn.32
;προφάσιος ἔχεσθαι Hdt.6.94
; fasten upon, attack, D.18.79; lay claim to,ἀμφοτέρων τῶν ἐπωνυμιέων Hdt.2.17
; to be zealous for, [ μάχης] S.OC 424; ;κοινῇ τῆς σωτηρίας X.An.6.3.17
, etc.3 come next to, follow closely, ib.1.8.4;ἕπεσθαι ἐχομένους ὅτι μάλιστα τῶν ἁρμάτων Id.Cyr.7.1.9
; of peoples or places, to be close, border on, c. gen., Hdt.4.169, Th.2.96, etc.; freq. in part., τὴν ἐχομένην [τῶν νεωρίων] στοάν Aen. Tact.11.3; οἱ ἐ. the neighbouring people, Hdt.1.134; ὁ ἐχόμενος the next man, Aen.Tact.22.27; of Time, τὸ ἐχόμενον ἔτος the next year, Th.6.3;ὁ ἐ. διαλογισμός PRev.Laws 16.15
(iii B.C.); τὰ ἐχόμενα τούτοις what follows, Pl.Grg. 494e (withoutτούτοις Isoc.6.29
).5 pertain to,ὅσα ἔχεται τῶν αἰσθήσεων Pl.Lg. 661b
;ἃ διδασκάλων εἴχετο Id.Prt. 319e
;ὅσα τέχνης ἔχεται Id.Men. 94b
, etc.: esp. in Hdt. in periphrases, τὰ τῶν ὀνειράτων, καρπῶν ἐχόμενα, 1.120, 193;ὀρνίθων ἢ ἰχθύων 2.77
; σιτίων, ἐσθῆτος, 3.25,66.II bear or hold for oneself, κρήδεμνα ἄντα παρειάων σχομένη before her cheeks, Od.1.334; ἀσπίδα πρόσθ' ἔσχετο his shield, Il.12.294, cf. 298, 20.262.IV keep oneself back, abstain or refrain from, ἀϋτῆς, μάχης, 2.98, 3.84;βίης Od.4.422
;ἐχώμεθα δηϊοτῆτος ἐκ βελέων Il.14.129
;τῆς ἀγωγῆς Hdt.6.85
;τῆς τιμωρίης Id.7.169
;τῶν ἀθίκτων S.OT 891
(lyr., s.v.l.): c.inf., A.R.1.328; ; κακῶν ἄπο χεῖρας ἔχεσθαι to keep one's hands from ill, Od.22.316;Μενέλεω σχέσθαι χέρα E.Rh. 174
: abs., σχέο, σχέσθε, hold! cease! Il.21.379, 22.416.V [voice] Pass. ofἔχω B. 1
, ἐπὶ ξυροῦ ἀκμῆς ἔχεται ἡμῖν τὰ πρήγματα are balanced on.., Hdt.6.11.------------------------------------ἔχω (B), -
6 κρατέω
κρατέω impf. ἐκράτουν; fut. κρατήσω; 1 aor. ἐκράτησα; pf. 1 pl. κεκρατήκαμεν 1 Macc 15:33, inf. κεκρατηκέναι; plpf. 3 sg. κεκρατήκει 4 Macc 6:32. Pass.: impf. ἐκρατούμην; fut. 3 pl. κρατηθήσονται; aor. ἐκρατήθην Eccl 9:12 v.l.; pf. κεκράτημαι, 3 pl. κεκράτηνται (Hom.+). The primary signification is exercise of power, then by transference① to accomplish someth. by overcoming obstacles, attain (Diod S 3, 54, 7 κ. τῆς ἐπιβολῆς=attain the purpose; likew. 17, 77, 4 and 20, 25, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 61 §249 οὐ … ἐκράτησε) τῆς προθέσεως the purpose Ac 27:13 (s. Field, Notes 144).② to use one’s hands to establish a close contact, holdⓐ hold τινά someone (fast) w. the hand (TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 19 [Stone p. 30]), so that the pers. cannot go away Ac 3:11.ⓑ hold in the hand (SibOr 3, 49; TestAbr A 10 p. 87, 29 [Stone p. 22]; A 12 p. 91, 5 [Stone p. 30] al.; GrBar 11:8) τὶ ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ Rv 2:1 (Polemo Perieg. [c. 200 B.C.] in Athen. 11, 67, 484c ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ κώθωνα κ.; cp. Plut., Mor. 99d).③ to take control of someone or someth., seize, controlⓐ of taking into custody arrest, apprehend τινά someone (cp. Ps 136:9; AscIs 3:12) Mt 14:3; 21:46; 26:4, 48, 50, 55, 57 (on the arrest of Jesus s. Feigel, Weidel, Finegan s.v. Ἰούδας 6); Mk 6:17; 12:12; 14:1, 44, 46, 49, 51; Ac 24:6; Rv 20:2.ⓑ of taking hold of forcibly and also without the use of force take hold of, grasp, seize (cp. 2 Km 6:6; SSol 3:4; TestSol 22:10); w. acc. of pers. or thing Mt 12:11; 18:28; 22:6; 28:9; κρατῆσαι αὐτόν take control of (Jesus) Mk 3:21. κ. ῥάβδον τῇ χειρί take hold of a staff w. the hand Hs 9, 6, 3 (cp. PGM 5, 451 κράτει τῇ ἀριστερᾷ σου τὸν δακτύλιον; Synes., Ep. 58 p. 202 πόδα). τῆς χειρός (τινος) take hold of (someone’s) hand (B-D-F §170, 2; Rob. 475; 1391; Ps 72:23; Gen 19:16; JosAs 29:3; ParJer 6:2; Jos., Bell. 1, 352) Mt 9:25; Mk 1:31; 5:41; 9:27; Lk 8:54; B 14:7 (Is 42:6). τινὰ τῆς χειρός take someone by the hand Mk 9:27 v.l.; cp. B 12:11 (Is 45:1).④ to hold up or serve as a foundation for someth., hold upright, support τὶ someth. Hs 9, 8, 5. τὰς χεῖρας v 3, 8, 3 (s. MDibelius, Hdb. ad loc.). Pass. be supported ὑπό τινος by someth. Hv 3, 3, 5. W. ἀπό instead of ὑπό: κρατοῦνται ἀπʼ ἀλλήλων receive support fr. one another (here w. focus on mutuality) 3, 8, 7. W. διά: ὁ κόσμος διὰ τεσσάρων στοιχείων κρατεῖται the world is supported by four elements 3, 13, 3.⑤ to control in such a way that someth. does not happen, hold back or restrain from, hinder in an action: w. acc. (so TestJob 35:1), foll. by ἵνα μή Rv 7:1. Pass. be prevented foll. by τοῦ μή and inf. (TestSol 10:43 C; B-D-F §400, 4; Rob. 1061; 1425) their eyes ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι Lk 24:16, prob. w. a suggestion of both physical and inward sight (cp. 4 Km 6:15–23; s. διανοίγω 1b).—Hold in one’s power (PTebt 61b, 229; POxy 237 VIII, 34; TestSol 6:3; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 84; Mel., P. 100, 769) pass. οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ it was impossible for him (Christ) to be held in its (death’s) power Ac 2:24.⑥ to adhere strongly to, holdⓐ of commitment to someone or someth. hold fast (to) someone or someth., and hence remain closely united. W. acc. τὴν κεφαλήν hold fast to the Head (i.e. to Christ) Col 2:19 (cp. SSol 3:4 ἐκράτησα αὐτὸν καὶ οὐκ ἀφήσω [ἀφῆκα BS] αὐτόν). τί to someth. (TestNapht 3:1 τὸ θέλημα τ. θεοῦ) τὴν παράδοσιν Mk 7:3; cp. vss. 4, 8; 2 Th 2:15. τὴν διδαχήν Rv 2:14f. τὸ ὄνομά μου vs. 13.—W. gen. of thing (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Γυναικόπολις: in the absence of the men τὰς γυναῖκας κρατῆσαι τοῦ πολέμου=the women kept the war going; Pr 14:18; Jos., Ant. 6, 116 τοῦ λογισμοῦ) τῆς ὁμολογίας hold fast to our confession Hb 4:14. τῆς ἐλπίδος 6:18. τῶν ἔργων τινός Hv 3, 8, 8.ⓑ hold fast, keep hold of someth. that belongs to oneself, so that it cannot be taken away Rv 2:25; 3:11.ⓒ keep to oneself a saying, in order to occupy oneself w. it later Mk 9:10.⑦ to cause a condition to continue, hold in place κ. τὰς ἁμαρτίας pronounce the sins unforgiven (opp. ἀφιέναι) J 20:23.—B. 746. DELG s.v. κράτος. M-M. TW. -
7 πολύς
πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, οῦ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.) ‘much’.—Comparative πλείων, πλεῖον (18 times in the NT, 4 times in the Apost. Fathers [including Hv 3, 6, 4; Hs 8, 1, 16] and Ath. 12, 3) or πλέον (Lk 3:13 and Ac 15:28 μηδὲν πλέον; otherwise, πλέον in the NT only J 21:15; 14 times in the Apost. Fathers [incl. μηδὲν πλέον Hs 1, 1, 6]; Ar. twice; Just. 6 times; Tat. once; Ath. 7 times), ονος; pl. πλείονες, and acc. πλείονας contracted πλείους, neut. πλείονα and πλείω (the latter Mt 26:53 [πλεῖον, πλείου vv.ll.]; B-D-F §30, 2; Mlt-H. 82; Thackeray p. 81f; Mayser p. 68f) ‘more’ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27=Stone p. 70 [πλείον]; TestJob 35:2; TestGad 7:2 [πλεῖον]; AscIs 3:8; [πλέον]; EpArist; apolog. exc. Mel.).—Superlative πλεῖστος, η, ον ‘most’ (Hom.+).① pert. to being a large number, many, a great number ofⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύα. adj., preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun) in the pl. many, numerous δυνάμεις πολλαί many mighty deeds Mt 7:22b. δαιμονιζόμενοι πολλοί 8:16. Cp. vs. 30; 9:10; 13:17; 24:11; 27:52, 55; Mk 2:15a; 6:13; 12:41; Lk 4:25, 27; 7:21b; 10:24; J 10:32; 14:2; Ac 1:3; 2:43; 8:7b; 14:22; Ro 4:17f (Gen 17:5); 8:29; 12:4; 1 Cor 8:5ab; 11:30; 12:12a, 20; 1 Ti 6:12; 2 Ti 2:2; Hb 2:10; 1J 4:1; 2J 7; Rv 5:11; 9:9; 10:11; 1 Cl 55:3ab. ἔτη πολλά many years: Lk 12:19b (εἰς ἔτη π.); Ac 24:10 (ἐκ π. ἐτῶν); Ro 15:23 (ἀπὸ π. [v.l. ἱκανῶν] ἐτῶν).—αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αἱ πολλαί Lk 7:47a. αἱ εὐεργεσίαι αἱ π. 1 Cl 21:1.—πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα many serious charges Ac 25:7 (cp. Ps.-Pla., Sisyph. 1, 387a πολλά τε καὶ καλὰ πράγματα; B-D-F §442, 11; Rob. 655). πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα σημεῖα J 20:30 (on the form X., Hell. 5, 4, 1 πολλὰ μὲν οὖν … καὶ ἄλλα λέγειν καὶ Ἑλληνικὰ καὶ βαρβαρικά; Dionys. Hal. 2, 67, 5; Ps.-Demetr. 142 πολλὰς κ. ἄλλας χάριτας; Jos., Ant. 3, 318; Tat. 38, 1. On the subject-matter Bultmann 540, 3; also Porphyr., Vi. Pyth. 28 after a miracle-story: μυρία δʼ ἕτερα θαυμαστότερα κ. θειότερα περὶ τἀνδρὸς … εἴρηται κτλ.).—ἄλλοι πολλοί many others IRo 10:1. ἄλλαι πολλαί Mk 15:41. ἄλλα πολλά (Jos., Bell. 6, 169, Ant. 9, 242; Just., D. 8, 1) J 21:25. ἕτεροι πολλοί Ac 15:35. ἕτερα πολλά (Jos., Vi. 39) Lk 22:65.—Predicative: πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐισερχόμενοι Mt 7:13.—Mk 5:9; 6:31; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). AcPl Ha 5, 16.—οὐ πολλοί not many=( only) a few οὐ πολλαὶ ἡμέραι (Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13; J 2:12; Ac 1:5; AcPl Ha 11, 1. οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοί not many wise (people) 1 Cor 1:26a; cp. bc. οὐ πολλοί πατέρες not many fathers 4:15.β. subst.א. πολλοί many i.e. persons—without the art. Mt 7:22; 8:11; 12:15; 20:28; 24:5ab; 26:28; Mk 2:2; 3:10 (Mt 12:15 has ascensive πάντας; other passages to be compared in this connection are Mk 10:45=Mt 20:28 πολλῶν and 1 Ti 2:6 πάντων. Cp. the double tradition of the saying of Bias in Clem. of Alex., Strom. 1, 61, 3 πάντες ἄνθρωποι κακοὶ ἢ οἱ πλεῖστοι τ. ἀνθρώπων κακοί.—On Mk 10:45 s. OCullmann, TZ 4, ’48, 471–73); 6:2; 11:8; Lk 1:1 (cp. Herm. Wr. 11, 1, 1b and see JBauer, NovT 4, ’60, 263–66), 14; J 2:23; 8:30; Ac 9:42; Ro 16:2; 2 Cor 11:18; Gal 3:16 (πολλοί= a plurality); Tit 1:10; Hb 12:15; 2 Pt 2:2. AcPl Ha 5, 8; 7, 5; 11, 3. Opp. ὀλίγοι Mt 22:14; 20:16 v.l. (cp. Pla., Phd. 69c ναρθηκοφόροι μὲν πολλοί, βάκχοι δέ τε παῦροι=the thyrsus-bearers [officials] are many, but the truly inspired are few)—W. a partitive gen. πολλοὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων Mt 3:7. π. πῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ Lk 1:16.—J 4:39; 12:11; Ac 4:4; 8:7a; 13:43; 18:8; 19:18; 2 Cor 12:21; Rv 8:11.—W. ἐκ and gen. (AscIs 3:1; Jos., Ant. 11, 151) πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν J 6:60, 66.—10:20; 11:19, 45; 12:42; Ac 17:12. ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου πολλοί J 7:31 (Appian, Iber. 78 §337 πολλοὶ ἐκ τοῦ πλήθους).ב. πολλά—many things, much without the art.: γράφειν write at length B 4:9. διδάσκειν Mk 4:2; 6:34b. λαλεῖν Mt 13:3. μηχανᾶσθαι MPol 3. πάσχειν (Pind., O. 13, 63 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 268; 403) Mt 16:21; Mk 5:26a; 9:12; Lk 9:22; 17:25; B 7:11; AcPl Ha 8, 19. ποιεῖν Mk 6:20 v.l. United w. another neut. by καί (Lucian, Icar. 20 πολλὰ κ. δεινά; Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 345 D.: πολλὰ κ. καλά; Ps.-Demetr., El. 70 πολλὰ κ. ἄλλα; likew. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §53; Arrian, Anab. 6, 11, 2) πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα many other things Lk 3:18. πολλὰ ἂν κ. ἄλλα εἰπεῖν ἔχοιμι Dg 2:10 (Eur., Ep. 3, 2, πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα εἰπεῖν ἔχω; Diod S 17, 38, 3 πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα … διαλεχθείς). ἐν πολλοῖς in many ways (Diod S 26, 1, 2; OGI 737, 7 [II B.C.]; Just., D. 124, 4 [of line of proof]) 2 Cor 8:22a. ἐπὶ πολλῶν (opp. ἐπὶ ὀλίγα) over many things Mt 25:21, 23.—W. art. (Pla., Apol. 1, 17a) τὰ πολλὰ πράσσειν transact a great deal of business Hs 4:5b.γ. elliptical δαρήσεται πολλά (sc. πληγάς) will receive many (lashes) Lk 12:47 (B-D-F §154; 241, 6).ⓑ comparative πλείων, πλεῖονα. adj. w. a plural (Diod S 14, 6, 1 μισθοφόρους πλείους=many mercenaries) πλείονας πόνους (opp. οὐχ ἕνα οὐδὲ δύο) 1 Cl 5:4. ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους for a (large) number of days, for many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277; cp. Theophr. in Apollon. Paradox. 29 πλείονας ἡμ.) Ac 13:31.—21:10 (Jos., Ant. 16, 15); 24:17; 25:14; 27:20. οἱ μὲν πλείονές εἰσιν γεγονότες ἱερεῖς the priests of former times existed in greater numbers Hb 7:23. ἑτέροις λόγοις πλείοσιν in many more words (than have been reported) Ac 2:40. ταῦτα καὶ ἕτερα πλείονα MPol 12:1.—W. a gen. of comparison (Just., A I 53, 3; Tat. 3, 2) ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων other slaves, more than (he had sent) at first Mt 21:36. πλείονα σημεῖα ὧν more signs than those which J 7:31. Also w. ἤ: πλείονας μαθητὰς ἤ more disciples than 4:1. After πλείονες (-α) before numerals the word for ‘than’ is omitted (B-D-F §185, 4; Kühner-G. II 311; Rob. 666; Jos., Ant. 14, 96) ἐτῶν ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος the man was more than 40 years old Ac 4:22. πλείους τεσσεράκοντα 23:13, 21. Cp. 24:11; 25:6 (Jos., Ant. 6, 306 δέκα οὐ πλείους ἡμέρας).—The ref. is to relative extent (cp. 2bα) in τὰ ἔργα σου τὰ ἕσχατα πλείονα τῶν πρώτων your deeds, the latter of which are greater than the former Rv 2:19.β. subst.א. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους the majority, most (Diog. L. 1, 20; 22; Jos., Ant. 10, 114) Ac 19:32; 27:12. W. ἐξ: ἐξ ὧν οἱ πλείονες most of whom 1 Cor 15:6. W. gen. and a neg. (litotes) οὐκ ἐν τ. πλείοσιν αὐτῶν ηὐδόκησεν ὁ θεός God was pleased with only a few of them 10:5. This is perh. (s. ג below) the place for 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6; 9:2. Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.ב. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους (even) more πλείονες in even greater numbers Ac 28:23. πολλῷ πλείους ἐπίστευσαν many more came to believe J 4:41.—διὰ τῶν πλειόνων to more and more people=those who are still to be won for Christ 2 Cor 4:15.ג. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους. In contrast to a minority οἱ πλείονες can gain the sense the others, the rest (so τὰ πλείονα Soph., Oed. Col. 36; τὸ πλέον Thu. 4, 30, 4; Jos., Ant. 12, 240; B-D-F §244, 3). So perh. (s. א above) ἵνα τ. πλείονας κερδήσω (opp. the apostle himself) 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6 (opp. the one who has been punished too severely.—In this case [s. א above] his punishment would have been determined by a unanimous vote of the Christian assembly rather than by a majority). Cp. 9:2; Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.ד. πλείονα (for πλεῖον) more Mt 20:10 v.l.; various things Lk 11:53. ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλείονα 1 Cl 24:5 (s. as adv. ParJer 7:26).ⓒ superl. adj. πλείστη w. a plural most of αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις Mt 11:20 (difft. B-D-F §245, 1).② pert. to being relatively large in quantity or measure, much, extensiveⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύα. adj. preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun)א. in the sg. much, large, great πολὺς ἀριθμός Ac 11:21. W. words that in themselves denote a plurality (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 80 §338 στρατὸς πολύς) πολὺς ὄχλος (s. ὄχ. 1a) Mt 14:14; 20:29; 26:47; Mk 5:21, 24; 6:34a; 8:1; 9:14; 12:37 (ὁ π. ὄχ.); Lk 5:29; 6:17a; 8:4; J 6:2, 5 (for the expression ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, in which π. follows the noun, J 12:9, 12, cp. Arrian, Anab. 1, 9, 6 ὁ φόνος πολύς); Ac 6:7; Rv 7:9; 19:1, 6. πολὺ πλῆθος (s. pl. 2bα) Mk 3:7f; Lk 5:6; 6:17b; 23:27; Ac 14:1; 17:4; 1 Cl 6:1. λαὸς πολύς many people Ac 18:10. Of money and its value, also used in imagery μισθὸς πολύς Mt 5:12; Lk 6:23, 35 (all three predicative, as Gen 15:1). ἐργασία π. Ac 16:16. π. κεφάλαιον 22:28. χρυσοῦ πολλοῦ … τρυφῆς πολλῆς AcPl Ha 2, 19.—Of things that occur in the mass or in large quantities (Diod S 3, 50, 1 πολλὴ ἄμπελος) γῆ πολλή Mt 13:5; Mk 4:5; θερισμὸς π. Mt 9:37; Lk 10:2 (both pred.). χόρτος π. J 6:10; καρπὸς π. (Cyranides p. 121, 11) 12:24; 15:5, 8.—λόγος π. a long speech (Diod S 13, 1, 2; Just., D. 123, 7) Ac 15:32; 20:2. περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11 (cp. Pla., Phd. 115d).—Of time: πολὺς χρόνος a long time (Hom. et al.; Demetr.(?): 722 Fgm. 7; Jos., Ant. 8, 342; 19, 28; Just., A II, 2, 11) J 5:6 (s. ἔχω 7b); Hs 6, 4, 4 (pred.). μετὰ πολὺν χρόνον (Jos., Ant. 12, 324) Mt 25:19. Differently Mk 6:35ab (s. 3aα).ב. adj. w. a noun in the pl. many, large, great, extensive, plentiful ὄχλοι πολλοί great crowds or probably better many people (as Diod S 20, 59, 2; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 3. For the corresponding mng. of ὄχλοι s. ὄχλος 1a) Mt 4:25; 8:1; 13:2; 15:30a; 19:2; Lk 5:15; 14:25. κτήματα πολλά a great deal of property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22 (cp. Da 11:28 χρήματα π.). ὕδατα πολλά much water, many waters (Maximus Tyr. 21, 3g of the Nile ὁ πολὺς ποταμός, likew. Procop. Soph., Ep. 111) J 3:23; Rv 1:15; 14:2; 17:1; 19:6b. θυμιάματα πολλά a great deal of incense 8:3. τὰ πολλὰ γράμματα Ac 26:24. πολλοὶ χρόνοι long periods of time (Plut., Thes. 6, 9). πολλοῖς χρόνοις for long periods of time (SIG 836, 6; pap) Lk 8:29; 1 Cl 44:3. χρόνοις πολλοῖς AcPlCor 2:10. ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων (Diod S 3, 47, 8; Jos., Ant. 14, 110; 17, 204) 1 Cl 42:5.β. subst.א. πολλοί many i.e. pers.—w. the art. οἱ πολλοί the many, of whatever appears in the context Mk 6:2 v.l. (the many people who were present in the synagogue); 9:26b (the whole crowd). Opp. ὁ εἷς Ro 5:15ac, 19ab; the many who form the ἓν σῶμα the one body 12:5; 1 Cor 10:17. Paul pays attention to the interests of the many rather than to his own vs. 33 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 212).—The majority, most (X., An. 5, 6, 19; Appian, Maced. 7, Bell. Civ. 4, 73 §309; 2 Macc 1:36; En 104:10; AscIs 3:26; Jos., Ant. 17, 72; Just., D. 4, 3) Mt 24:12; Hb 12:15 v.l. W. a connotation of disapproval most people, the crowd (Socrat., Ep. 6, 2; Dio Chrys. 15 [32], 8; Epict. 1, 3, 4; 2, 1, 22 al.; Plut., Mor. 33a; 470b; Plotinus, Enn. 2, 9, 9; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 42) 2 Cor 2:17; Pol 2:1; 7:2.—Jeremias, The Eucharistic Words of Jesus3, tr. NPerrin, ’66, 179–82; 226–31, and TW VI 536–45: πολλοί.ב. πολύ much ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολὺ κτλ. Lk 12:48 (Just., A I, 17, 4 twice πλέον). Cp. 16:10ab; 2 Cl 8:5; καρποφορεῖν π. bear much fruit Hs 2:3. πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον much in every way Ro 3:2 (Ael. Aristid. 34, 43 K.=50 p. 562 D. gives answer to a sim. quest. asked by himself: πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖα).—Js 5:16.—As gen. of price πολλοῦ for a large sum of money (Menand., Fgm. 197 Kö.; PRyl 244, 10. S. στρουθίον.) Mt 26:9.—Of time: ἐπὶ πολύ ( for) a long time (JosAs 19:3; Ar. 65, 3; s. also ἐπί 18cβ) Ac 28:6; AcPl Ha 10, 21. μετʼ οὐ πολύ soon afterward Ac 27:14 (μετά B 2c).—ἐπὶ πολύ more than once, often (Is 55:7) Hm 4, 1, 8.—Before a comp. (as Hom. et al.; B-D-F §246; Rob. 664) in the acc. πολὺ βέλτιον much better Hs 1:9. π. ἐλάττων v 3, 7, 6 (Ar. 6, 2). π. μᾶλλον much more, to a much greater degree (Dio Chrys. 2, 10; 17; 64 al.; Ael. Aristid. 34, 9 K.=50 p. 549 D.; Just., A II, 8, 3; D. 95, 1 al.) Hb 12:9, 25 (by means of a negative it acquires the mng. much less; cp. Diod S 7, 14, 6 πολὺ μᾶλλον μὴ … =even much less); Dg 2:7b. π. πλέον 2:7a (Ar. 11, 7). π. σπουδαιότερος 2 Cor 8:22b. Cp. π. τιμώτερον 1 Pt 1:7 v.l.; in the dat. of degree of difference πολλῷ μᾶλλον (Thu. 2, 51, 4; UPZ 42, 48 [162 B.C.]; EpArist 7; 24 al.; Sir prol. ln. 14; Jos., Ant. 18, 184; Just., A I, 68, 9; Tat. 17, 4) Mt 6:30; Mk 10:48b; Lk 18:39; Ro 5:9f, 15b, 17; 1 Cor 12:22; 2 Cor 3:9, 11; Phil 2:12. πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρείσσον 1:23 (v.l. without μᾶλλον). πολλῷ πλείους J 4:41. πολλῷ στρουθίων as v.l. Mt 20:31 and Lk 12:7 (both N.25 app.; on the strong ms. support for this rdg. s. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 21–24).—W. the art. τὸ πολύ (opp. τὸ ὀλίγον as X., An. 7, 7, 36) 2 Cor 8:15 (cp. Ex 16:18).ג. πολύς (Diod S 14, 107, 4 πολὺς ἦν ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ=he was strongly inclined toward punishing) μὴ πολὺς ἐν ῥήμασιν γίνου do not be profuse in speech, do not gossip 1 Cl 30:5 (Job 11:3).—Παπίας ὁ πολύς Papias (7), prob. to be understood as ὁ πάνυ; s. πάνυ d.ⓑ comp. πλείων, πλεῖον; adv. πλειόνωςα. adj., w. a singular (TestJob 35:2 διὰ πλείονος εὐωδίας) καρπὸν πλείονα more fruit J 15:2, 8 P66; Hs 5, 2, 4. τὸ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου the greater part of the throng 8, 1, 16. ἐπὶ πλείονα χρόνον for a longer time (PTebt 6:31 [II B.C.]) Ac 18:20. Foll. by gen. of comparison: πλείονα τιμήν more honor Hb 3:3b.—IPol 1:3a. Foll. by παρά τινα for comparison Hb 3:3a; 11:4; Hs 9, 18, 2. ὅσῳ πλείονος κατηξιώθημεν γνώσεως, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον 1 Cl 41:4.—τὸ πλεῖον μέρος as adv. acc. for the greater part Hv 3, 6, 4a.β. as subst. πλεῖον, πλέον more τὸ πλεῖον the greater sum (cp. Diod S 1, 82, 2=the greater part; Ps 89:10) Lk 7:43. πλεῖον λαμβάνειν receive a larger sum Mt 20:10. W. partitive gen. ἐπὶ πλεῖον προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας they will arrive at an ever greater measure of impiety=become more and more deeply involved in impiety 2 Ti 2:16. W. a gen. of comparison πλεῖον τῆς τροφῆς someth. greater (more important) than food Mt 6:25; Lk 12:23. πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ Mt 12:41; cp. vs. 42; Lk 11:31, 32. ἡ χήρα πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν the widow put in more than all the rest Mk 12:43; Lk 21:3. μηδὲν πλέον nothing more (Jos., Bell. 1, 43; cp. Just., D. 2, 3 οὐδὲν πλέον); the words than, except following are expressed by παρά and the acc. Lk 3:13 or by πλήν w. gen. Ac 15:28, w. εἰ μή Hs 1:6.—The acc. is used as an adv. more, in greater measure, to a greater degree (Herm. Wr. 13, 21 Nock after the mss.) Lk 7:42; IRo 1:1; IEph 6:2; w. a gen. of comparison Mt 5:20 (περισσεύω 1aβ); J 21:15; IPol 5:2 (s. Ad’Alès, RSR 25, ’35, 489–92). τριετίαν ἢ καὶ πλεῖον for three years or even more Ac 20:18 D (cp. TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27 [Stone p. 70, 27]).—ἐπὶ πλεῖον any farther (of place) Ac 4:17 (TestGad 7:2; Ath. 12 [ἐπί 4bβ]); (of time) at length Ac 20:9 (ἐπί 18cβ) or any longer, too long 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1 (ἐπί 18cβ); any more, even more (ἐπί 13) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). Strengthened πολὺ πλέον much more, much rather (4 Macc 1:8; cp. X., An. 7, 5, 15; BGU 180, 12f [172 A.D.] πολλῷ πλεῖον; Ar. 11, 7 πολλῷ πλεῖον) Dg 2:7; 4:5.—Also w. indications of number (s. 1bα) πλεῖον ἢ ἄρτοι πέντε Lk 9:13 (the words πλ. ἤ outside the constr. as X., An. 1, 2, 11). In πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων more than twelve legions of angels Mt 26:53 the text is uncertain (B-D-F §185, 4; s. Rob. 666).—The adv. can also be expressed by πλειόνως (Aeneas Tact. 237; Jos., Ant. 17, 2; Leontios 24, p. 52, 10) more ὅσον … πλειόνως the more … the more IEph 6:1.ⓒ superl. πλεῖστος, ονα. adj.א. superlative proper τὸ πλεῖστον μέρος the greatest part w. partitive gen. Hs 8, 2, 9; 9, 7, 4. As adv. acc. for the greatest part 8, 5, 6; 8, 10, 1 (s. μέρος 1d).ב. elative (s. Mayser II/1, 1926, 53) very great, very large (ὁ) πλεῖστος ὄχλος Mt 21:8 (ὁ πλεῖστος ὄχλος could also be the greatest part of the crowd, as Thu. 7, 78, 2; Pla., Rep. 3, 397d); Mk 4:1.β. subst. οἱ πλεῖστοι the majority, most Ac 19:32 D (Just., D. 1, 4; cp. D. 48, 4 πλεῖστοι).③ pert. to being high on a scale of extentⓐ positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύα. as simple adj., to denote degree much, great, strong, severe, hard, deep, profound (Diod S 13, 7, 4 πολὺς φόβος; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 57; 58 p. 265, 3 πολλὴ δικαιοσύνη; Eccl 5:16 θυμὸς π.; Sir 15:18 σοφία; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 4 [Stone p. 54] ἀθυμία; Just., D. 3, 1 ἠρεμία) ἀγάπη Eph 2:4. ἀγών 1 Th 2:2. ἄθλησις Hb 10:32. ἁπλότης Hv 3, 9, 1. ἀσιτία Ac 27:21. βία 24:6 [7] v.l. γογγυσμός J 7:12. διακονία Lk 10:40. δοκιμή 2 Cor 8:2. δόξα Mt 24:30; Hv 1, 3, 4; 2, 2, 6. δύναμις Mk 13:26. ἐγκράτεια strict self-control Hv 2, 3, 2. εἰρήνη complete or undisturbed peace (Diod S 3, 64, 7; 11, 38, 1) Ac 24:2. ἔλεος 1 Pt 1:3. ἐπιθυμία 1 Th 2:17. ζημία Ac 27:10. ζήτησις 15:7. θλῖψις 2 Cor 2:4a; 1 Th 1:6. καύχησις 2 Cor 7:4b (pred.). μακροθυμία Ro 9:22. ὀδυρμός Mt 2:18. παράκλησις 2 Cor 8:4. παρρησία (Wsd 5:1) 3:12; 7:4a (pred.); 1 Ti 3:13; Phlm 8. πεποίθησις 2 Cor 8:22c. πλάνη 2 Cl 1:7. πληροφορία 1 Th 1:5. πόνος Col 4:13. σιγή a great or general hush (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 25; Arrian, Anab. 5, 28, 4) Ac 21:40. στάσις 23:10. τρόμος 1 Cor 2:3. φαντασία Ac 25:23. χαρά 8:8; Phlm 7. ὥρα πολλή late hour (Polyb. 5, 8, 3; Dionys. Hal. 2, 54; Jos., Ant. 8, 118) Mk 6:35ab.β. subst. πολλά in the acc. used as adv. greatly, earnestly, strictly, loudly, often etc. (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 14; Diod S 13, 41, 5; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 19, 2; Aelian, VH 1, 23; 4 Km 10:18; Is 23:16; TestSol 1:1; GrBar; ApcMos; Jos., Ant. 14, 348) ἀλαλάζειν πολλά Mk 5:38 (s. ἀλαλάζω). πολλὰ ἁμαρτάνειν Hs 4:5c (ApcMos 32). π. ἀνακρίνειν Ac 28:18 v.l. π. ἀπορεῖν Mk 6:20 (Field, Notes 29). π. ἀσπάζεσθαι 1 Cor 16:19 (s. ἀσπάζομαι 1a). δεηθῆναι π. (GrBar 4:14; Jos., Vi. 173; 343) Hs 5, 4, 1. διαστέλλεσθαι Mk 5:43 (s. διαστέλλω). π. ἐπιτιμᾶν 3:12. π. ἐρωτᾶν earnestly pray Hv 2, 2, 1. κατηγορεῖν π. Mk 15:3 (s. κατηγορέω 1a). κηρύσσειν π. talk freely 1:45. κλαίειν bitterly Ac 8:24 D (ApcMos 39). κοπιᾶν (ApcMos 24; CIG IV 9552, 5 … μοι πολλὰ ἐκοπίασεν, cp. Dssm., LO 266, 5 [LAE 317]) work hard Ro 16:6, 12; 2 Cl 7:1b. νηστεύειν π. fast often Mt 9:14a. ὀμνύναι π. Mk 6:23. παρακαλεῖν Mk 5:10, 23; Ac 20:1 D; 1 Cor 16:12. π. πταίειν make many mistakes Js 3:2. π. σπαράσσειν convulse violently Mk 9:26a.—W. the art. ἐνεκοπτόμην τὰ πολλά I have been hindered these many times (cp. Ro 1:13 πολλάκις) Ro 15:22 (v.l. πολλάκις here too).γ. subst. πολύ in the acc. used as adv. greatly, very much, strongly (Da 6:15, 24 Theod.) ἀγαπᾶν πολύ show much affection, love greatly Lk 7:47b. κλαίειν π. weep loudly Rv 5:4.—Mk 12:27; Ac 18:27.ⓑ superlative, the neut. acc. πλεῖστον, α as adv. (sing. Hom. et al.; pl. Pind. et al.)α. pl. πλεῖστα in the formula of greeting at the beginning of a letter πλεῖστα χαίρειν (POxy 742; 744; 1061 [all three I B.C.]; PTebt 314, 2 [II A.D.] and very oft. in pap.—Griech. pap ed. Ltzm.: Kl. Texte 142, 1910, p. 4, 5, 6, 7 al.; Preis. II s.v. πλεῖστος) heartiest greeting(s) IEph ins; IMg ins; ITr ins; IRo ins; ISm ins; IPol ins.β. sing. τὸ πλεῖστον at the most (Aristoph., Vesp. 260; Diod S 14, 71, 3 πεμπταῖοι ἢ τὸ πλ. ἑκταῖοι; POxy 58, 17; PGiss 65:9) κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλ. τρεῖς (word for word like Περὶ ὕψους 32, 1) 1 Cor 14:27.—B. 922f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. -
8 χείρ
χείρ, ἡ, χειρός, χειρί, χεῖρα, dual χεῖρε, χεροῖν, pl. χεῖρες, χερῶν, χεῖρας, penult. being regularly short, when the ult. is long; dat. pl. regularly χερσί ( χειρσί occurs in cod.Vat. of LXX, as Jd.7.19, 1 Ch.5.10, and late Inscrr. as CIG2811A b.10 ([place name] Aphrodisias), 2942c ([place name] Tralles): but Poets used the penult. long or short in all cases, as the verse required, χερός, χερί, χέρα, χέρε, χέρες, χέρας (of which Hom. uses onlyχερί; χέρα h.Pan.40
); gen. dual (lyr.), 1394 (lyr.), IG22.1498.76; gen. pl. χειρῶν ib.31, common in Prose.—Poet. forms, dat. pl. χείρεσι ([etym.] ν ) once in Hom., Il.20.468, also Q.S.2.401, 5.469 (v.l.);χείρεσσι Il.12.382
, Pi.O.10(11).62, S.Ant. 976 (lyr.), 1297 (lyr.), and once in trim., E.Alc. 756; χέρεσσι ([etym.] ν) Hes.Th. 519, 747, B.17.49; ([place name] Galatia):—[dialect] Dor. nom. [full] χέρς Timocr.9; [full] χήρ Sophr. in PSI11.1214a3 (also, = δίψακος, Ps.-Dsc.3.11); gen.χηρός Alcm.32
, IG42(1).121.22 (Epid., iv B. C.); acc. pl. χῆρας ib.96, [dialect] Aeol.χέρρας Alc.Supp.4.21
, Theoc.28.9.—On the accent and declension of these forms, v. Hdn.Gr.2.277, 748:— the hand, whether closed,παχεῖα Il.3.376
;βαρεῖα 11.235
, al.; or open, flat, χερσὶ καταπρηνέσσι, χειρὶ καταπρηνεῖ, 15.114, Od.13.164, al.;εἰς τὴν χ. ἐγχεάμενοί τι X.Cyr.1.3.9
: freq. in pl. where a single hand is meant, Il.23.384, etc.; reversely, sg. where more than one hand is spoken of, e.g. Od.3.37, etc.; dual joined with pl.,ἄμφω χεῖρας 8.135
;χεῖρε ἀμφοτέρας Il.21.115
.2 hand and arm, arm (cf. Ruf.Onom.11,82, Gal.2.347),πῆχυν χειρὸς δεξιτερῆς Il.21.166
; ;χεῖρες ἀπ' ὤμων ἀΐσσοντο Hes.Th. 150
;χ. εἰς ὤμους γυμναί Longus 1.4
; ἐν χερσὶ γυναικῶν πεσέειν into the arms, Il.6.81, etc.: hence, words are added to denote the hand as distinct from the arm,ἄκρην οὔτασε χεῖρα 5.336
;περὶ ἄκραις ταῖς χ. χειρῖδας ἔχουσι X.Cyr.8.8.17
, cf. Pl. Prt. 352a.3 of the hand or paw of animals,ὅσα [ζῷα] χεῖρας ἔχει X.Mem.1.4.14
; πορεύεσθαι ἐπὶ χειρῶν go on all fours. LXX Le.11.27; so of monkeys, Arist.HA 502b3; of the fore-paws of the hyena, Id.Fr. 369; of the bear, Plu.2.919a.II Special usages:1 to denote position, ποτέρας τῆς χερός; on which hand? E.Cyc. 681;ἐπὶ δεξιὰ χειρός Pi.P.6.19
;ἐπ' ἀριστερὰ χειρός Od.5.277
;χειρὸς εἰς τὰ δεξιά S.Fr. 598
;λαιᾶς χειρός A.Pr. 714
(but χείρ is often omitted with δεξιά, ἀριστερά, as we say the right, the left).2 freq. in dat. of all numbers with Verbs which imply the use of hands, λάβε χειρί, χερσὶν ἑλέσθαι, Il.5.302, 10.501;χερσὶν ἀσπάζεσθαι Od.3.35
;προκαλίζεσθαι 18.20
; χειρί, χεροῖν ψαῦσαι, S.OT 1510, 1466: sts. this dat. is added pleon. by way of emphasis,ὄνυξι συλλαβὼν χερί Id.Aj. 310
.3 gen., by the hand,χειρὸς ἔχειν τινά Il.4.154
;χειρὸς ἑλών 1.323
, etc.; γέροντα δὲ χειρὸς ἀνίστη he raised him by the hand, 24.515, cf. Od.14.319;χερὶ χειρὸς ἑλών Pi.P.9.122
;τινὰ χειρός ἑλκειν Id.N.11.32
;ἀνέλκειν τινὰ τῆς χ. Ar.V. 569
(anap.).4 the acc. is used when one takes the hand of a person,χεῖρα γέροντος ἑλών Il. 24.361
;χεῖρ' ἕλε δεξιτερήν Od.1.121
; χεῖράς τ' ἀλλήλων λαβέτην, in pledge of good faith, Il.6.233; soἔμβαλλε χ. δεξιὰν πρώτιστά μοι S.Tr. 1181
; alsoἔμβαλλε χειρὸς πίστιν Id.Ph. 813
, cf. OC 1632.5 other uses of the acc.:a in prayer or entreaty, χεῖρας ἀνασχεῖν [θεοῖς] Il.3.275, etc.;ποτὶ γούνασι χεῖρας βάλλειν Od.6.310
;ἀμφὶ.. Ἀρήτης βάλε γούνασι χεῖρας Ὀδυσσεύς 7.142
; ;ἀμφί τινι χεῖρε β. 21.223
;περίβαλε δὲ χέρας Ar.Th. 914
, cf. A.Ag. 1559 (anap.);χεῖρας προΐσχεσθαι Th.3.58
, 66; so alsoχεῖρας ἀείρων Od.11.423
, cf. Il.7.130 (tm.); χ. ἀνατείνειν (v.ἀνατείνω 1.1
).b τὰς χεῖρας αἴρειν to hold up hands in token of assent or choice, of persons voting, Ar.Ec. 264;τὴν χ. αἴρειν And.3.41
;ὅτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτα, ἀράτω τὴν χ. X.An.5.6.33
, cf. 7.3.6; ἀνατεινάτω τὴν χ. ib.3.2.9, 33;χεῖρας ὀρεγνύς Il.22.37
;χεῖρ' ὀρέγων εἰς οὐρανόν 15.371
;χεῖρας ὀ. τινί Od.12.257
;πρός τινα Pi. P.4.240
;ποτὶ στόμα χεῖρ' ὀρέγεσθαι Il.24.506
(but χεῖρά τισι ὀ. to reach them one's hand in help, X.HG5.2.17); alsoχεῖρε ἑτάροισι πετάσσας Il.4.523
, etc.;πιτνὰς εἰς ἐμὲ χεῖρας Od.11.392
(but χεῖρε πετάσσας abs., of one swimming, etc., 5.374, al.).I as a protector, Il.9.420, etc.: less freq. τισι, 4.249, cf. 5.433;χεῖρά θ' ὕπερθεν ἔχεις IG14.1003.10
([place name] Rome).d in hostile sense, χεῖρας or χεῖρα ἐπιφέρειν τινί, Il.1.89, 19.261, al.;χεῖρας ἐφιέναι τινί 1.567
, Od.1.254, al.;χεῖρας ἐπιβάλλειν τισί Plb.3.2.8
, etc.;χέρα τινὶ προσενεγκεῖν Pi.P.9.36
; χεῖρας ἐπί τινι ἰάλλειν, v. ἰάλλω 1.1.e χεῖρας ἀπέχειν keep hands off,λοιμοῖο βαρείας χεῖρας ἀφέξει Il.1.97
codd.;κερτομίας δέ τοι.. καὶ χεῖρας ἀφέξω.. μνηστήρων Od.20.263
;ἀθανάτων ἀπέχειν χέρας A.Eu. 350
(lyr.);τὼ χεῖρε ἀπέχεται Pl.Smp. 213d
;παύειν χεῖράς τινος Il.21.294
.f χεῖρας ἐπιτιθέναι τινί, in token of consecration, 1 Ep.Ti.5.22, etc.6 with Preps.:a ἀνὰ χεῖρας ἔχειν τινάς to be intimate with.., Plb.21.6.5;αἱ ἀνὰ χεῖρά τινων ὁμιλίαι S.E.M.1.64
; τὰ ἀνὰ χεῖρα πράγματα the matters in hand, Plu.2.614b, etc. (also οἱ ἀνὰ χ. χρόνοι the current period, PRyl.88.21 (ii A. D.); τὰ ἀνὰ χ. what comes his way, Ps.-Ptol.Centil.18; ἀνὰ χ. τῆς πύλης hard by.., LXX 2 Ki.15.2.b ἀπὸ χειρὸς λογίσασθαι to reckon off-hand, roughly, Ar.V. 656 (anap.), cf. Luc.Hist.Conscr.29: but πότισον τὴν γῆν ἀπὸ χειρός by hand, PCair.Zen.155 (iii B. C.).c διὰ χερῶν ἔχειν, λαβεῖν, literally, to have or take between the hands, A.Supp. 193, S.Ant. 916; διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν to hold in the hand, ib. 1258 (anap.), Ar.V. 597 (anap.); to have in hand, i. e. under control, Th.2.76;διὰ χειρῶν ἔχειν τὴν πολιτείαν Arist.Pol. 1308a27
; τὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων keep under control, Th.2.13: later, to have a work in hand, be engaged in it, Phld.Acad.Ind.p.69M. ([etym.] χερός), D.H.Isoc.4;τὰ ὅπλα Plu.Cor.2
, etc. (also διὰ χ. by direct payment, opp. διὰ τῆς τραπέζης by banker's order, BGU1156.8 (i B. C.), etc.; cf.διὰ χ. ἔσπευδε τὴν πρᾶσιν Charito 1.12
); of arms,διὰ χειρὸς εἶναι Luc.Anach.35
; διὰ χ. ἔχειν, c. part., to be continually doing, Plu.2.767c;διὰ χειρός τινος ποιεῖν τι LXXJo.17.4
, al., cf. Act.Ap.7.25, al.d ἐς χεῖρας λαβεῖν τι literally, S.El. 1120, etc.; to take a matter in hand, undertake it,πρᾶγμ' ἐς χέρας λαβόντ' E.Hec. 1242
;ἄγεσθαί τι ἐς χεῖρας Hdt.1.126
, 4.79, etc.; δοῦναί τινι ἐς χέρας, εἰς χεῖρα, S.El. 1348, X.Cyr.8.8.22;καταστῆσαι εἰς τὰς χ. τινος Aeschin.2.28
; of persons, ἵκεο χεῖρας ἐς ἁμάς thou hast fallen into our hands, Il.10.448 (in Hom. also simplyὅ τι χεῖρας ἵκοιτο Od.12.331
, cf. 24.172); soεἰς χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν τινι X.Cyr.7.4.10
, cf. 2.4.15: generally, to have to do with any one, converse with him, Id.An.1.2.26 (soἐς χεῖρα γῇ ξυνῆψαν E.Heracl. 429
): most freq. ἐς χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν τισι to come to blows or close quarters with.., A.Th. 680;ἀλλήλοις Th.7.44
: abs.,εἰς χ. ἐλθεῖν Id.4.96
;ἐς χ. ἰέναι Id.2.3
, 4.72, cf. PTeb.765.6 (ii B. C.);συνιέναι X.Cyr.8.8.22
; also ἐς χειρῶν νόμον (fort. νομόν)ἀπικέσθαι Hdt.9.48
; ἐν χειρῶν νόμῳ (fort. νομῷ)ἀπόλλυσθαι Id.8.89
, cf. Aeschin.1.5, SIG167.37 (Mylasa, iv B. C.), Heraclid.Pol.25, Plb.1.34.5, 5.111.6; [full] ἐν χειρὸς νόμῳ Arist.Pol. 1285a10, D.H.6.26;ἐν χειρῶν νομαῖς SIG700.29
(Lete, ii B.C.), v. l. in LXX 3 Ma.1.5; ἐν χεροῖν δίκῃ cj. in E.Ba.738;εἰς χεῖρας συμμεῖξαι τοῖς πολεμίοις X.Cyr.2.1.11
; also εἰς χεῖρας δέχεσθαί τινας to await their charge, Id.An.4.3.31;ἐς χ. ὑπομεῖναί τινας Th. 5.72
.e ἐκ χειρός by hand of man, S.Aj.27: from near at hand, at close range,ἐκ χειρὸς βάλλειν X.An.3.3.15
; ἀμύνασθαι ib.5.4.25;μάχεσθαι Id.HG7.2.14
, cf. D.S.19.6;πληγὰς ἐκ χ. ἀναδέξασθαι Plu.
tim.4;οὐ μὴ σωθῇ ἐκ χ. σιδήρου LXX Jb.20.24
; ἡ ἐκ χ. δίκη lynch law, D.H.4.37;ἡ ἐκ χ. βία Plb.9.4.6
: metaph., ἡ ἐκ χ. θεωρία closerange reading, D.H.Isoc.2; so of time, out of hand, off-hand, forthwith, Plb.5.41.7, al.fδέπας μητρὶ ἐν χειρὶ τίθει Il.1.585
, cf. Od.13.57, 15.120, al. (always so of a cup, hence ἐν χερσὶ τίθει δέπας, though found in most codd., was condemned by the critics in Il.l.c., Od.3.51, 15.130);πρεσβήϊον ἐν χερὶ θήσω Il.8.289
; τόξον, ἔγχος ἔχων ἐν χειρί, 15.443, 17.604;σκῆπτρον δέ οἱ ἔμβαλε χειρί Od.2.37
; butἐν.. χειρὶ σκῆπτρον ἔθηκεν Il.23.568
; of a gift,ἐν χερσὶ τίθει 1.441
, 446; ἐν ταῖς χ. ἔχειν, literally, Pl.R. 432d;τὰ ὅπλ' ἐν ταῖς χ. ἔχων D.9.8
, etc. (metaph.,ἔτι μεμνημένων ὑμῶν καὶ μόνον οὐκ ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν ἕκαστ' ἐχόντων Id.18.226
); but ἐν χερσὶν ἔχειν also, to have in hand, be engaged in,τὸν γάμον Hdt.1.35
;ἑορτήν Plu.Alex.13
;τὴν περὶ Δημοσθένους πραγματείαν D.H.Th.1
;ἐν χειρί τινα δίκην ἔχων Pl.Tht. 172e
; ὁ ἐν χερσὶ πόλεμος the war in hand, D.H.8.87; περιτειχισμὸς ἐν χερσὶν ὤν ib.21;ἡ ἐν χ. ζήτησις S.E.M.11.208
, etc.; freq. of fighting, ἐν χερσί hand to hand,ἐν χ. ἦν ἡ μάχη Th.4.43
;ἐν χ. ἀποκτεῖναι Id.3.66
, cf. 4.57,96, etc.;ἐν χ. γίγνεσθαι τοῖς ἐναντίοις Id.5.72
;ἐν χ. εἶναί τινος X.HG4.6.11
;δίκη ἐν χερσί Hes.Op. 192
;ὁ ψόφος τῶν ὅπλων καὶ τῶν ἵππων ὁ φρυαγμὸς ἐν χερσὶν ἐδόκει εἶναι D.S.19.31
; ἡ ἐν χερσὶν [δυστυχία] Plu.Cleom.22: also in dual,τἀν χεροῖν S.Ant. 1345
(lyr.); ἐν χειρί τινος by the hand of.., LXX Jo.21.2, al.;ἐν χ. ἀγγέλου Act.Ap.7.35
(v.l.).g ἐπὶ χειρὸς ἔχειν on or in one's hand, Thgn.490; ἐπὶ χεῖράς τινων ἐκφέρουσι put into their hands, Plu.2.815b; also ἐπὶ χεῖρά τινος next to, LXXNe.3.4.h κατὰ χειρός, of washing the hands before meals, ὕδωρ κατὰ χειρός (sc. φερέτω τις), Ar.V. 1216, cf.Av. 464 (anap.), Fr. 502 (lyr.), Philox. 1, Ath.9.408e; (without ὕδωρ)κατὰ χ. ἐδόθη Alex.261.2
, cf. Arched. 2.3: prov. of that which is easily come by, Telecl.1.2 (anap.);πάντα μοι κατὰ χ. ἦν τὰ πράγματα
at hand,Pherecr.
146.5; also κατὰ χειρῶν δοῦναι, χέειν, λαβεῖν, Philyll.3, Antiph.287 (v.l.), Men.470 (troch.), cf. Phot.s.v. κατὰ χειρὸς ὕδωρ: κατὰ χεῖρα in deed or act,κατὰ χ. γενναιότατοι D.H.7.6
; opp. συνέσει, Plu.Phil.7; κατὰ χεῖρά σου according to thy will, LXX Si.25.26: but κατὰ χεῖρας [τῆς σοφίας] by her side, ib.14.25.i μετὰ χερσὶν ἔχειν between, i.e. in, the hands, Il.11.4, 15.717; [ἄλεισον] μετὰ χ. ἐνώμα Od.22.10
: μετὰ χεῖρας ἔχειν to have in hand, be engaged in, Hdt.7.16.β, Th.1.138.k λάβε παρὰ χεῖρα take in hand, LXX To. 11.4; but τὸ πὰρ χειρός the work in hand, B.13.10.m πρὸς χειρός τινος by his hand, A.Supp.66 (lyr.), etc.; πρὸς ἐμὴν χεῖρα at the signs given by my hand, S.Ph. 148 (anap.); πρὸς χεῖρα ὑποβορβορύζοντες on pressure, Hp.Epid.4.7.n ὑπὸ χερσὶ ἁλοῦσα under, i.e. by, another's hands, Il.2.374, etc.; ὑπὸ χεῖρα ποιεῖσθαι to bring under one's power, X.Ages.1.22; οἱ ὑπὸ χ. persons in one's power, D.6.34; ὑπὸ τὴν χ. ἐλθεῖν to come into one's hand, Luc.Herm.57, etc.; ὑπὸ χ. in hand, i.e. in stock, Arist.Mete. 369b33; but also, at hand, i.e. at once, Plu.2.548e; τὰ ὑπὸ χ. ib.56b, Dsc.1.35; ὁ ὑπὸ χ. the attendant, Dsc.5.75;παρέργως καὶ ὑπὸ χ.
extempore,Plu.
Arat.3, etc.; also καθύπο χεῖρα κινῶν [τὰς οὐσίας], in Alchemy, Ps.-Democr. p.51 B.III the hand often receives the attributes of the person using it, χ. μεγάλη, of Zeus, Il.15.695 (χ. παγκρατής, of God, Secund.Sent.3; χ. ὑπερμήκης, of the 'long arm' of the king, Hdt.8.140.β') ; θοὴ χ., of one throwing, Il.12.306;ἀφνειά Pi.O.7.1
, cf. S.El. 458; εὐσεβεστέρα, εὐφιλής, A.Ch. 141, Ag.34; κάρβανος ib. 1061; (anap.); , etc.: to denote wealth or poverty,πλειοτέρῃ σὺν χ. Od.11.359
;κενεὰς σὺν χ. ἔχοντες 10.42
, cf. E.Hel. 1280, etc.2 it is represented as acting of itself,χεῖρες μαιμῶσιν Il.13.77
, cf. S.Aj.50;χεὶρ ὁρᾷ τὸ δράσιμον A.Th. 554
;δήμου κρατοῦσα χ. Id.Supp. 604
(dub. l.): prov.,ἁ δὲ χ. τὰν χ. νίζει Epich.273
; or simply,ἁ χ. τὰν χ. AP5.207
(Mel.).3 pl., in theurgy, name for spiritual powers,αἱ δημιουργικαὶ [τοῦ Ἀπόλλωνος] δυνάμεις ἃς θεουργῶν παῖδες χεῖρας ἀποκαλοῦσιν Procl. in Cra. p.101
P., cf. eund. in R.2.252K.IV to denote act or deed, opp. mere words, in pl.,ἔπεσιν καὶ χερσὶν ἀρήξειν Il.1.77
; μνῆμ' Ἑλένης χειρῶν of her handiwork, her art, Od.15.126 (so in sg.,δώρημ' ἐκείνῳ τἀνδρὶ τῆς ἐμῆς χ. S.Tr. 603
);χερσὶν ἢ λόγῳ Id.OT 883
(lyr.), cf. OC 1297, etc.; τῇ χειρὶ χρᾶσθαι to use one's hands, i.c. be active, stirring, opp. ἀργὸς ἐπεστάναι, Hdt.3.78, cf. 9.72; τὰς χ. προσφέρειν to apply force, X.Mem.2.6.31: sg.,βούλευμα μὲν τὸ Δῖον, Ἡφαίστου δὲ χείρ A.Pr. 619
; μιᾷ χειρί single-handed, D.21.219;χειρὶ καὶ ποδὶ καὶ πάσῃ δυνάμει Aeschin.3.109
, cf. 2.115;χερσίν τε ποσίν τε Il.20.360
, cf. Pi.O.10(11).62, esp. of using the hands in a fight, cf. supr. 11.6d, e, f; of deeds of violence, πρὶν χειρῶν γεύσασθαι before we try force, Od.20.181; ἀδίκων χ. ἄρχειν to give the first blow, X.Cyr.1.5.13, Antipho 4.2.1, Lys.4.11, etc.;ἀμυνόμενος ἄρχοντα χειρῶν Pl.Lg. 869d
: generally, χεῖρες violent measures, force,ἐπίσχετε θυμὸν ἐνιπῆς καὶ χειρῶν Od.20.267
;ὑπόδικος χερῶν A.Eu. 260
(lyr.);χερσὶ πεποιθώς Il.16.624
, etc.; ἐν χειρῶν νόμῳ v. supr. 11.6d; ὅπως θανάτοιο βαρείας χ. ἀλάλκοι, v.l. for κῆρας, Il.21.548.V a number, band, body of men, esp. of soldiers,χεὶρ μεγάλη Hdt.7.157
; in dat.,οὐ σὺν μεγάλῃ χ. Id.5.72
;πολλῇ χ. 1.174
, Th.3.96, E.Heracl. 337; pleon.,χ. μεγάλῃ πλήθεος Hdt.7.20
; ; οἰκεία χείρ, for χεὶρ οἰκετῶν, E.El. 629;σὺν πλήθει χερῶν S.OT 123
.VI handwriting,τὴν ἑαυτοῦ χεῖρα ἀρνήσασθαι Hyp.Lyc.Fr.5
, cf. IG9(1).189 ([place name] Phocis); τῇ ἐμῇ χ. Παύλου I Ep. Cor.16.21, Ep.Col.4.18: copy, counterpart of a document, SIG712.31 (Crete, ii B.C.); deed, instrument,ἡ χ. ἥδε κυρία ἔστω PRein.28.18
(ii B.C.), cf. PCair.Zen. 477 (iii B.C.), etc.b handiwork of an artist or workman,γλαφυρὰ χ. Theoc.Epigr.8.5
, etc.;αἱ Ἐφεσίου χεῖρες Herod.4.72
, cf. 6.66;σοφαὶ χέρες APl.4.262
;τὰς Φειδίου χ. Lib.Or. 30.22
.VII of any implement resembling a hand:1 a kind of gauntlet, X.Eq.12.5, Poll.1.135 (pl.).2 χ. σιδηρᾶ grappling-iron, Th.4.25, 7.62; also of an anchor, AP6.38 (Phil.).4 in LXX, pillar or cairn, as it were a finger pointing to heaven,χεὶρ Ἀβεσσαλώμ LXX 2 Ki.18.18
; also ἀνέστακεν αὐτῷ χεῖρα, i.e. trophy, ib. 1 Ki.15.12.5 χεῖρες ἐλάτιναι, of oars, Tim.Pers.7.7 instrument of torture, LXX 4 Ma.8.13. -
9 ὑπό
ὑπό [pron. full] [ῠ], Prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: [dialect] Aeol. [full] ὐπά Alc.39; [dialect] Boeot. [full] ὑπάAἈρχ.Δελτ. 14
Pl. ii 19 (Thespiae, iii B.C.); [dialect] Ion. ηυπύ only in IG 14.871 (Cumae, v B.C.); Arc. [full] ὁπύ Schwyzer 664.15,21 (Orchom.Arc., iv B.C.); in [dialect] Ep. [full] ὑπαί (also B. 12.139): this is found in Hom. only six times as a well-attested reading (ὑ. πόδα Il.2.824
,ὑ. δέ 3.217
, 11.417, 12.149,ὑ. δείους 10.376
, 15.4); elsewh. (before λ ν ρ ϝ ) it is weakly attested as v. l. for ὑπὸ ([etym.] ?ὑπόX ¯ ), e.g. ποσσὶ δ' ὑπὸ (v.l. ὑπαὶ)λιπαροῖσι Il.2.44
, al.; but ὑπαὶ νεφέων is given by most codd. in Il.15.625, 16.375 (v. Allen ed. maj.), andὑπαὶ νεφέεσσι Anon.
ap. Plu.2.38e; also in compds.,ὑπαιδείδοικα h.Merc. 165
, ὑπαιφοινίσσω (q. v.); it is not freq. in Trag. Poets, A.Ag. 892, 944, 1164 (lyr.), Eu. 417, S.El. 711, 1418 (lyr.), Inach. in PTeb. 692 ii5 (lyr.), E.El. 1188 (lyr.), Ar. Ach. 970 (paratrag.). (With ὑπό ([etym.] ὕπο) cf. Skt. úpa 'towards, near to, etc.', Goth. uf 'under'.)A WITH GENITIVE,I of Place, with Verbs of motion, from under, αὖτις ἀναστήσονται ὑ. ζόφου they will rise again from under the gloom, Il.21.56;ὑ. χθονὸς ἧκε φόωσδε Hes.Th. 669
;ῥέει κρήνη ὑ. σπείους Od.9.141
, cf. Pl.Phdr. 230b;ὄσσε δεινὸν ὑ. βλεφάρων ἐξεφάανθεν Il.19.17
; ἐσιδόντες ὑπαὶ χειμῶνος αἴγλαν from under the storm-cloud, B.12.139; esp. of rescuing from under another's power, after the Verbs ἐρύεσθαι, ἁρπάζειν, ῥύεσθαι, ἐρύειν, Il.9.248, 13.198, 17.224, 235;ἤγαγεν ὑμέτερόνδ' ἀνδροκτασίης ὕ. λυγρῆς
from the consequences of,23.86
; also ἵππους μὲν λῦσαν ὑ. ζυγοῦ from under the yoke, 8.543, Od.4.39; ὑπ' ἀρνειοῦ λυόμην I loosed myself from under the ram, 9.463; σπλάγχνων ὕπο ματέρος μόλεν, i.e. was born, Pi.N.1.35, cf. O.6.43; rarely in Trag.,ὑ. πτερῶν σπάσας E.Andr. 441
;περᾷ γὰρ ἥδ' ὑ. σκηνῆς πόδα Id.Hec.53
; once in Hdt.,τὰς δέ οἱ ἵππους ὑ. τοῦ ἅρματος νεμομένας ἀφανισθῆναι 4.8
;αἴ τις ὑ. τῶν νομίων τῶν ἐπιϝοικων ἀνχωρέῃ SIG47.27
(Locris, v B.C.); cf. ὑπέκ.2 of the object under which a thing is or is placed, under, beneath, with collat. sense of motion, as μοχλὸν ὑ. σποδοῦ ἤλασα πολλῆς thrust it in under the embers, Od. 9.375;ὑ. στέρνοιο τυχήσας Il.4.106
;τοὺς μὲν ὑ. χθονὸς εὐρυοδείης πέμψαν Hes.Th. 717
: also without the sense of motion,ὑπ' ἀνθερεῶνος ὀχεὺς τέτατο Il.3.372
;βάθιστον ὑ. χθονός ἐστι βέρεθρον 8.14
;ἐτέθαπτο ὑ. χθονός Od.11.52
;κεκευθὼς πολεμίας ὑ. χθονός A.Th. 588
;ὑπ' ἀγκῶνος βέλη Pi.O.2.83
;νέρθεν ὑπ' ἐγκεφάλοιο Il.16.347
;τὰ ὑ. γῆς δικαιωτήρια Pl.Phdr. 249a
;δεξιὰν ὑφ' εἵματος κρύπτειν E.Hec. 342
; φέρειν ζώνης ὕπο ib. 762: Thom.Mag.p.375 R. says that ὑ. = under takes gen. in [dialect] Att., acc. in 'Hellenic' Greek; κατακρύψας ὑ. κόπρου, which is v.l. in Od.9.329 for ὑ. κόπρῳ, is called by Eust.1631.36 Ἀττικώτερον, ὁποῖον καὶ τὸ φέρειν τι ὑ. κόλπου ἢ ὑ. μάλης (v. κόλπος, μάλη); but in [dialect] Att. Prose, Hdt., and the Koine ὑ. c. gen. in signfs. 1.1, 2 is almost limited to these and a few other phrases, esp. ὑ. γῆς; it is not found at all in Th., LXX, Ptolemaic papyri, and NT; X. has ὑ. ἁμάξης ( = from under) An.6.4.22,25; the Orators have only ὑ. μάλης, Lys.Fr.54, D.29.12; ὑ. γῆς is found in Pl.Ap. 18b, Mx. 246d, R. 414d, al., Arist.Mete. 352b6, al., Hipparch.2.2.45, Plb.18.18.10 ([etym.] ὑ. τῆς γῆς), 21.28.3,10.b metaph., ἀρετῶσι δὲ λαοὶ ὑπ' αὐτοῦ under his rule, Od.19.114.II of Cause or Agency, freq. with pass. Verbs, and with intr. Verbs in pass. sense,μή πως τάχ' ὑπ' αὐτοῦ δουρὶ δαμήῃς Il.3.436
, cf. 4.479; ; εὖτ' ἂν πολλοὶ ὑφ' Ἕκτορος θνῂσκοντες πίπτωσι 1.242;τὸν.. τοκέα ὑ. τοῦ.. παιδὸς ἀποθνῄσκειν Hdt.1.137
; , cf. Th.7, al.;πέλεκυς.. ὅς τ' εἶσιν διὰ δουρὸς ὑπ' ἀνέρος Il.3.61
;ὑπ' Ἀχαιῶν.. φοβέοντο.. ἀπὸ νηῶν 16.303
; (anap.);ὑ. τοῦ Μήδου δεινότερα τούτων πάσχοντες Th.1.77
;ἐκπεσόντες ὑ. τοῦ πλήθους Id.4.66
;ἀναστάτων Καμαριναίων γενομένων ὑ. Συρακοσίων Id.6.5
;ὑφ' ὑμῶν αὐτῶν καὶ μὴ ὑ. τῶν πολεμίων τοῦτο παθεῖν Id.4.64
; κλύοντές ἐσμεν αἰσχίστους λόγους.. τοῦδ' ὑπ' ἀνδρὸς ἀρτίως we have been called shameful names by.., S.Aj. 1321; κακῶς ὑ. τῶν πολιτῶν ἀκούειν to be ill spoken of by.., Isoc.4.77, cf. Pl.Hp.Ma. 304e, X.An. 7.7.23; of a subordinate agent, ὑ. κήρυκος προαγορεύειν, ἀπειπεῖν κηρύκων ὕπο, Hdt.9.98, E.Alc. 737, cf. Th.6.32;ἐμῶν ὑπ' ἀγγέλων.. πορεύεται S.Tr. 391
;ὑ. ἀγγέλων πέμπων Pl.Phlb. 66a
: sts. with a verbal Subst., τὸ ὑ. νόμου ἐπίταγμα (i. e. ἐπιταττόμενον) Id.R. 359a;ἐκφορὰ φίλων ὕπο A.Th. 1029
;ἡ ὑπ' ἀρετῆς Ἡρακλέους παίδευσις X. Mem.2.1.34
;ἡ ὑ. πάντων τιμή Id.Cyr.3.3.2
;Ἥρας δεσμοὶ ὑ. ὑέος Pl. R. 378d
; so ἄτρωτον ἦν ὑ. στύγους ( = οὐ τετρωμένον) prob. in A.Ch. 532.2 also in pregnant phrases, not only of the immediate act of the agent, but also of its further result, ὅθ' ὑ. λιγέων ἀνέμων σπέρχωσιν ἄελλαι hasten driven on by them, Il.13.334; ὑφ' Ἕκτορος.. φεύγοντες fleeing before him, 18.149,χάσσονται ὑπ' ἔγχεος 13.153
, cf. 7.64, 11.119, 424, Od.5.320, 7.263, al.;πράγματα εἶχον ὑ. λῃστῶν X.HG5.1.5
; ἔπαινον, αἰτίαν ἔχειν ὑ. τινῶν, Hdt.9.78, A.Eu.99;οὐκέτι ἀποχωρεῖν οἷόν τ' ἦν ὑ. τῶν ἱππέων Th.7.78
, cf. Ar.V. 1084.3 freq. of things as well as persons,ὡς διάκειμαι ὑ. τῆς νόσου Th.7.77
;κεῖμαι νούσου ὕ. στυγερᾶς IG42(1).125.8
(Epid., iii B.C.);χαλεπῶς ἔχειν ὑ. τραυμάτων Pl.Tht. 142b
;ὑ. δόρατος πλαγείς IG42(1).122.64
(Epid., iv B.C.); ὑ. ἔχιος φῦμα ib.123.4 (ibid., iv B.C.); ἰάθη ὑ. ὄφιος ib.121.113 (ibid., iv B.C.);κατεσκεύασαν τὰς πύλας κλείεσθαι ὑ. σφύρας τε μεγάλης καὶ κτύπου παμμεγέθους γιγνομένου Aen.Tact.20.4
: of the agency of feelings, passions, etc.,ἀνόρουσ' ὑ. χάρματος h.Cer. 371
; ἐνδακρύειν, ἀνολολύξαι χαρᾶς ὕπο, A.Ag. 541, 587;μαίνεται.. ὑφ' ἡδονῆς S.El. 1153
;χλωρὸς ὑπαὶ δείους Il.10.376
;ὑ. δέους ἔρρηξε φωνήν Hdt.1.85
, cf. Th.6.33;οὐ δυνατὸν τὸν δῆμον ἐσόμενον ὑ. τῶν κακῶν καρτερεῖν Id.4.66
;ὑ. κακοῦ ἀγρυπνίῃσι εἴχετο Hdt.3.129
;ὑπ' ἄλγους A.Eu. 183
; ;ὑ. λύπης S.OT 1073
: hence ὑπό is used even with active Verbs, where a passive word may be supplied, e.g. ὑ. ἀρετῆς καὶ προθυμίης συνεπλήρουν τὰς νέας from courage, i. e. impelled by courage, Hdt.8.1;ὤρυσσον ὑ. μαστίγων Id.7.22
, cf. 56; οὐδὲ σέ γε δόλος ἔσχ' ὑ. χειρὸς ἐμᾶς by my agency, S.Ph. 1118 (lyr.); αἰ μήτις αὐτὸς δοίη, μὴ ὑπ' ἀνάγκας not under compulsion, GDI5128.5 ([place name] Vaxos).4 ὑπό freq. serves to denote the attendant or accompanying circumstances,νέφος ἐρχόμενον κατὰ πόντον ὑ. Ζεφύροιο ἰωῆς Il.4.276
, cf. 16.591, etc.: sts. with part. added, ἀμφὶ δὲ νῆες σμερδαλέον κονάβησαν ἀϋσάντων ὑπ' Ἀχαιῶν at their shouting, i.e. when they shouted, 2.334, 16.277;ἴαχε σάλπιγξ ἄστυ περιπλομένων δηΐων ὕ. 18.220
.5 of accompanying music, to give the time,κώμαζον ὑπ' αὐλοῦ Hes.Sc. 281
, cf. 278;ᾄδων ὑπ' αὐλητῆρος Archil.123
, cf. Thgn.825, Charon Fr.9;πίνειν ὑ. σάλπιγγος Ar.Ach. 1001
: generally, of anything attendant, δαΐδων ὕ. λαμπομενάων ἠγίνεον by torchlight, Il.18.492, cf. E.Hel. 639 (lyr.), Ion 1474 (lyr.);καταθάψομεν.. ὑ. κλαυθμῶν A.Ag. 1554
(anap.);ὑπ' εὐκλείας θανεῖν E.Hipp. 1299
; ; ὑπ' εὐφήμου βοῆς θῦσαι offer a sacrifice accompanied by it, S.El. 630; ὑ. φανοῦ πορεύεσθαι by lantern-light, X.Lac.5.7; ὑ. πομπῆς ἐξάγειν τινά in or with solemn procession, Hdt.2.45, cf. Ar.Th. 1030; ὑ. βίης βήξας coughing with violence, violently, Hdt.6.107; ἐτόξευον ὑ. μαστίγων, i.e. they shot and lashed, X.An.3.4.25: v. infr. B. 11.4, C. IV. 1.7 Math., ἡ ὑ. ΘΔΗ the angle ΘΔΗ ( = ἡ ὑ. τῶν ΘΔ, ΔΗ περιεχομένη γωνία), Procl. Hyp.2.26; but also τὸ ὑ. τῶν ΑΓ, ΓΒ the rectangle contained by ΑΓ, ΓΒ, = ΑΓ χ ΓΒ, Euc.2.4.8 ναῦλον ὄνων γ εἰς τὴν πόλιν ὑ. οἴνου laden with wine, Pap. in Hermes 28.163 (ii A.D.), cf. ib.479, and infr. C. IV. 2.B WITH DATIVE (esp. in Poets, never in LXX (Jb.12.5 is dub. l.) or NT, not common in Arist., Ptolemaic papyri, or Plb.), of Position under,ὑ. ποσσί Il.2.784
, al.; ὑ. πλατανίστῳ ib. 307, cf. 18.558; ὑ. Τμώλῳ at its foot, 2.866, cf. Od.1.186;Βερύσιοι ὑ. τῇ Ἴδῃ IG12.191.11
, cf. 373.118, al.;ὑ. τῇ ἀκροπόλι Hdt.6.105
; τῶν θανόντων ὑπ' Ἰλίῳ under its walls, E.Hec. 764, cf. A.Ag. 860;πέτρῃ ὕ. γλαφυρῇ εὗδον, Βορέω ὑπ' ἰωγῇ Od.14.533
;ὑ. τοῖς ὄρεσιν ἔχειν τὰς πηγάς Arist.Mete. 350b27
;ὑ. πέτρᾳ παῖς IG42(1).122.19
(Epid., iv B.C.); ὑ. τῷ ναῷ ἀστραγαλίζοντος αὐτοῦ ib.121.25 (ibid., iv B.C.); ηυπὺ τῇ κλίνῃ τούτῃ ληνὸς (or Λῆνος) ηύπυ ib.14.871 (Cumae, v B.C.);στρουθοὶ ὑ. τῇ τραπέζῃ Michel 832.33
(Samos, iv B.C.);ὑ. τῇ μασχάλῃ Hp.Art.11
;χέλυν δ' ὑ. μασχάλῃ εἶχεν h.Merc. 242
;ὑ. ταῖς μασχάλαις Arist.PA 688b5
,14; ὁ ὑ. τῇ γῇ ἀήρ under the earth, Id.Cael. 295a28; ἐὰν ὑ. σοὶ κατακλινῇ lies next below you, Pl.Smp. 222e; ὑφ' ἅρμασι under, i.e. yoked to, the chariot, Il.8.402, 18.244;εἶχε μάχαιραν ὑφ' αὑτῷ παρεσκευασμένος Plb.8.20.6
codd., cf. POxy. 1800 Fr.2.36 (Vit.Aesop.);ὑ. τοῖς χιτωνίσκοις περιζώματα φοροῦσιν Plb.12.26a
.4, cf. 13.7.9; τά τε θηρία καὶ τὰς ὑπ' αὐτοῖς σχεδίας under them, on which they stood, Id.3.46.8;τῆς γῆς τῆς ὑ. τῷ κόσμῳ κειμένης Timae.
ap. eund.12.25.7;οἱ ὑ. τῇ ἄρκτῳ, τῇ μεσημβρία, οἰκοῦντες Adam.2.31
, cf. Arist.Pr. 940a37, Phgn. 806b16;ὑ. τῷ μετώπῳ ὀφρύες Id.HA 491b14
;ὑ. τῷ γενείῳ Plb.34.10.9
;τὰ ὑ. τοῖς ὕδασι καὶ ὑμέσι καὶ ὑέλοις Hero
*Deff.135.12;ὑ. τῷ δέρματι Gal. 18(2).102
.2 with Verbs of motion, where rest or position follows, εἷσαν ὑ. φηγῷ set [him] down under it, Il.5.693;ἔζευξαν ὑφ' ἅρμασιν.. ἵππους Od.3.478
, cf. Il.24.782;ὑ. δ' ἄξοσι.. ἔπιπτον 16.378
, cf. X.Cyr.7.1.37;δέμνι' ὑπ' αἰθούσῃ θέμεναι Il.24.644
.3 in such phrases as ὑ. χερσί τινος ἁλῶναι, δαμῆναι, 2.374, 860, al.;ἐμῇς ὑ. χερσὶ δάμασσον 3.352
;ὑ. δουρὶ δαμῆναι 5.653
, etc.;ἔκπεσον ἵππων Ἀτρεΐδεω ὑ. χερσί 11.180
;ὤλετο.. ὑ. γαμφηλῇσι λέοντος 16.489
; (lyr.);ἐν κονίῃσι πέσοιεν ὑπ' ἀνδράσι Il.6.453
;ὑ. τινὶ κτείνεσθαι 16.490
.4 behind,ὑ. φάλαγγι Ascl.Tact.6.1
; under the cover or protection of,ὑ. τούτῳ τῷ φράγματι τοὺς ὑπορύσσοντας εἶναι Aen.Tact.37.9
;ὑ. ταῖς αὑτῶν ἀσφαλείαις Plb. 1.57.8
, 4.12.10, 16.6.1.II of the person under whose hand, power, or influence, or the thing by or through which a thing is done, ὑπ' Ἀργείοισι φέβοντο fled before them, Il.11.121; freq. in Hom. with intr. or pass. Verbs,ἐφόβηθεν ὑφ' Ἕκτορι Il.15.637
;ὁρμηθέντες ὑ. πληγῇσιν ἱμάσθλης Od.13.82
;βῆ.. θεῶν ὑ. πομπῇ Il.6.171
;ὦρτο δὲ κῦμα πνοιῇ ὕπο 23.215
;ὑ. λαίλαπι βέβριθε χθών 16.384
; τεκεῖν, τεκέσθαι ὑ. τινί, 2.714, 728, 742;ἀτῆθαι ὑ. τῷ μεμφομένῳ GDI4994.8
([place name] Crete);ὁ χρησμὸς ὁ γεγονὼς ὑ. τοῖ Ἀπόλλωνι Inscr.Magn.38.5
, cf. 12,31,52.2 expressing subjection or dependence, ὑ. τινί under one's power,δέδμητο δὲ λαὸς ὑπ' αὐτῷ Od.3.305
, cf. Il.9.156;ὑπ' ἀνδράσιν οἶκον ἔχουσιν Od. 7.68
; εἶναι ὑ. τισί to be subordinate, subject to them, Th.1.32; ὑ. Χείρωνι τεθραμμένος under the eye of.., Pl.R. 391c; ἔχειν ὑφ' ἑαυτῷ have under one, at one's command, X.Cyr.2.1.26;τὰ θηρία τὰ ὑ. τοῖς ἀνθρώποις Pl.R. 563c
;ὑ. τινὶ στρατεύσασθαι Plu.Cic.44
: in pregnant sense,ἵνα.. πάντα ὑ. Πέρσῃσι γένηται Hdt.7.11
, cf. Th.7.64;ὑπ' ἑωυτῷ ποιήσασθαι Hdt.7.157
;κινδυνεύσαιμ' ἂν ὑ. τῇ δυσχερεστάτῃ γενέσθαι τύχῃ Lys.24.6
;ὑ. τῷ Μακεδόνι ταττομένων Plb.18.11.4
;τοὺς τραφέντας ὑ. τούτοις Id.6.7.2
.3 of the subordination of things coming under a class,αἱ ὑ. ταῖς τέχναις ἐργασίαι Pl.Smp. 205c
;τὸ ὑ. ταῖς γεωμετρίαις Id.R. 511b
;ὄργανα.. τὰ ὑ. τῇ μουσικῇ Id.Hp.Ma. 295d
.4 as in A. 11.5, ὑπ' αὐλητῆρι πρόσθ' ἔκιον advanced to the music of the flute-player, Hes.Sc. 283; ὑπ' αὐλῷ, ὑ. κήρυκι καὶ θεολόγῳ, Luc.DDeor.2.2, Alex.19;ὑ. μάστιξι διορύττειν τὸν Ἄθω Plu.2.470e
: generally, of attendant circumstances,ἐξ ἁλὸς εἶσι.. πνοιῇ ὕπο Ζεφύροιο Od.4.402
; ὑ. ῥάβδοις καὶ πελέκεσι κατιών escorted by the lictors, Plu.Publ.10; ὑ. σκότῳ, νυκτί, A.Ag. 1030 (lyr.), A.R. 1.1022, etc.;λάμπει δ' ὑ. μαρμαρυγαῖς ὁ χρυσός B.3.17
;αἰθομένα δᾲς ὑ. ξανθαἵσι πεύκαις Pi.Fr.79
;ὑ. φωτὶ πολλῷ προσῄει Plu.Galb.14
;ὑ. λαμπάσιν ἡμμέναις Hld.10.41
; ὑ. πολλῷ στρατῷ escorted by a great host, Nic.Dam.10J.;ὑ. δικαιοσύνῃ διαγαγεῖν τὸν βίον Pl.Ep. 335d
.— ὑπό has no sense c. dat. which it has not also c. gen.; but all its senses c. gen. do not belong to the dat.:—later ὑπό c. dat. is found as a mere periphr. of the dat.,στέφος.. αὐτὸς ὑφ' ἡμετέραις πλεξάμενος παλάμαις AP5.73
(Rufin.), cf. 85 (Claudian.);λέων ὑπ' ἄκοντι τετυμμένος A.R.2.26
, cf. Man.2.131.C WITH ACCUSATIVE, of Place; to express motion towards and under an object, ὑ. σπέος ἤλασε μῆλα drove them under, i.e. into, the cave, Il.4.279;ὑ. ζυγὸν ἤγαγεν Od.3.383
; σεῦ ὕστερος εἶμ' ὑ. γαῖαν, i.e. shall die, Il.18.333;νέεσθαι ὑ. ζόφον 23.51
, cf. Od.3.335; κατακρύπτειν τινὰ ὑ. τὴν αὐτὴν θύρην under shelter of it, i.e. behind it, Hdt.1.12;πάϊς ὣς ὑ. μητέρα δύσκεν εἰς Αἴαντα Il.8.271
;ὅκως ἔωσι ὑ. τὸν πεζὸν στρατὸν τὸν σφέτερον Hdt.9.96
;ὑ. τὸν πρῶτον λόχον τῶν ὁπλιτῶν τὸν πρῶτον λόχον τῶν ψιλῶν τετάχθαι Ael.Tact.15.2
; of coming close up under a lofty citadel, ἤλθεθ' ὑ. Τροίην up to T., Od.4.146;ὅτ' ἔμελλεν ὑ. πτόλιν αἰπύ τε τεῖχος ἵξεσθαι Il.11.181
;παυρότερον λαὸν ἀγαγόνθ' ὑ. τεῖχος ἄρειον 4.407
;ὑ. τὰ τείχη φεύγειν Plb.1.74.11
;ὑ. τὰς ἴλας φεύγειν Id.3.65.7
, cf. 3.105.6, 11.21.5, al.;ὑ. ταὐτὸ στέγος εἰσελθεῖν GDI3536
B 3 ([place name] Cnidus);πᾶν ὃ ἐὰν ἔλθῃ.. ὑ. τὴν ῥάβδον LXXLe.27.32
, cf. De.4.11, al.; so ὑ. δικαστήριον ὑπαχθείς, ἀγαγόντες, Hdt.6.72, 104 (cf. ὑπάγειν ὑ. τοὺς ἐφόρους ib.82) prob. refers to the elevated seats of the judges in court, cf. ὑπάγω A ΙΙ.2 of Position or Extension under an object, without sense of motion,Ἀρκαδίην ὑ. Κυλλήνης ὄρος Il.2.603
, cf. 824, etc.;ἰκριώσασι ὑ. τὴν ὀροφήν IG12.374.76
; ἐργασαμένοις τὸ ἄνθεμον ὑ. τὴν ἀσπίδα ib.371.9;τὰ μὲν ὑ. τὸν λόφον καὶ τὰμ φάραγγα Inscr.Prien.37.162
(ii B.C.);ἀνθέντω ὑ. τὸν ναὸν τᾶς Δάματρος IG5(1).1498.13
(loc. inc., ii B.C.); ὅσσοι ἔασιν ὑπ' ἠῶ τ' ἠέλιόν τε everywhere under the sun, Il.5.267;ὑπ' αὐγὰς ἠελίοιο φοιτῶσι Od.2.181
;τῶν ὑ. τοῦτον τὸν ἥλιον.. ἀνθρώπων D.18.270
;τὰ ὑ. τὴν ἄρκτον Hdt. 5.10
, cf. Arist.Mete. 362a17;οἴκησις ἡ λεγομένη ὑ. τὸν πόλον Gem.5.38
, cf. 16.21, al.;ὑ. τὸν οὐρανόν LXXEx.17.14
, al., UPZ106.14 (i B.C.);τὸ ὑ. τὴν ἀκρόπολιν Th.2.17
;ὁ ὑ. γῆν λεγόμενος εἶναι θεός Hdt.7.114
, cf. Il.19.259; ὑ. γῆν is more freq. than ὑ. γῆς in Arist., Mete. 349b29, al., in Hipparch., 1.3.10, al., and entirely supersedes ὑ. γῆς in Hdt., 2.124, 125, 127, 148, 150, 3.102, 4.195, 7.114, and Gem., 2.19, al.; it is found also in Plb.21.28.11, etc.; ὑ. γῆν the nadir, opp. μεσουράνημα, PLond.1.98r.49, 110.33 (i/ii A.D.); alsoἄγχε δέ μιν.. ἱμὰς ἁπαλὴν ὑ. δειρήν Il.3.371
;Τρῶες.. πτῶσσον ὑ. κρημνούς 21.26
;ἀγέροντο.. ἄλσος ὕ. σκιερόν Od.20.278
;τρωφεὶς ὑ. τὸν ὀφθαλμόν IG42(1).122.120
(Epid., iv B.C.);οὐλὴ ὑπ' ὀφθαλμὸν δεξιόν PCair.Zen76.13
(iii B.C.);ὑ. τὸ μέρος τοῦ ἐνοφειλομένου ὑπογραψάτω ὅσον ἰδίᾳ ἔχει PRev.Laws 19.2
(iii B.C.);κείμενος ὑ. τὸν ὀμφαλόν Sor.1.7
, cf. 67, al.;ὑ. τὰς πύλας ἵππων πόδες φαίνονται Th.5.10
;μὴ ὑποτιθέναι κύλικα ὑ. τὴν κλίνην IG12(5).593
A21 (Ceos, v B. C.); ὑ. τὸν ὀδόν ib.42(1).102.249 (Epid., iv B.C.);καταψύξατε ὑ. τὸ δένδρον LXX Ge.18.4
; ὑ. τὸν λέβητα ib.Ec.7.7(6); ὑ. τοὺς πόδας ib.La.3.34;εἰς τοὺς ὑ. πόδα χωρεῖ τόπους Dsc.5.75
(v.πούς 1.6
g); ἡ ὑ. πόδα (sc. γραμμή ) the base of a triangle, Hero *Mens.55; also ὑπ' αὐγὰς.. λεύσσουσαι πέπλους holding them up to the light, E.Hec. 1154; also ὑ. τὸν ὀφθαλμόν close to the eye, Arist. Pr. 874a9;ὑποκειμένης τῆς Εὐβοίας ὑ. τὴν Ἀττικήν Isoc.4.108
;ὑπ' αὐτὴν ἐσχάτην στήλην ἔχων ἔχριμπτ' ἀεὶ σύριγγα S.El. 720
;εἰ θεωρήσειεν ὑπ' αὐγὰς τὸν ἀνθρώπειον βίον Iamb.Protr.8
(cf.αὐγή 1
): of subordinate position.κατακλίνεσθαι ὑ. τινά Luc.Symp.9
; τίς ὑ. τίνα; who is next to whom, Onos.10.2.b Math., ὁ κύβος ὁ ὑ. τὴν.. σφαῖραν inscribed in the sphere, Papp.440.5;εἶναι ὑ. τὸ αὐτὸ ὕψος Euc.11.29
, Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.19; ὑ. τὰν αὐτὰν γωνίαν subtending.., Id.Aren. 1.20 (cj.), cf. 21; ,al.3 of the logical subordination of things under a class,τῶν ἑτερογενῶν καὶ μὴ ὑπ' ἄλληλα τεταγμένων Arist.Cat. 1b16
, etc.; οἱ ὑ. τὸ ψεῦδος τεταγμένοι in the category of.., Luc.Ind.20.II of subjection, control, dependence, never in Hom., once in Hdt.,ὑ. βασιλέα δασμοφόρος 7.108
;ὑ. σφᾶς ποιεῖσθαι Th.4.60
, cf. Pl.R. 348d, Arist. HA 488a10, etc.;ἕως κα ᾖ ὑ. τὸν πατέρα Test.Epict.3.29
;ὑ. τιν' ἦν τῶν βασιλέων Men.340
;τί δ' οὐ κρατέοντος ὑπ' ἰσχύν; Call.Jov.75
, cf. 74;ὑ. Δία Γῆν Ἥλιον Sammelb. 5616
(i A.D.), POxy.722.6 (i/ii A.D.), etc. (v.ἥλιος 11.1
);ὑ. θεὸν καὶ ἄνθρωπον Michel854.52
(Halic., iii B.C.);τοῦ τοπαρχοῦντος ὑ. σέ PCair.Zen.322.3
(iii B.C.);στρατενσάμενον ὑ. ἄρχοντα Ἀντίοχον IG12(1).43.7
([place name] Rhodes);μηδὲ ὑ. δεσπότην ὤν LXXPr. 6.7
, cf. Ps.143.2; for ὑ. χεῖρα, v. χείρ; οἱ ὑ. τινά X.Cyr.3.3.6,8.8.5, etc.;τοῖς ὑφ' αὑτὸν τεταγμένοις GDI3750.75
([place name] Rhodes).III of Time, in the course of, during, or to be left untranslated in English,ἐκέλευε Τοωσὶ ποτὶ πτόλιν ἡγήσασθαι νύχθ' ὕ. τήνδ' ὀλοήν Il.22.102
;ὑ. τὴν νύκτα ταύτην Hdt.9.51
, cf. 58; ὑ. τὴν πρώτην ἐπελθοῦσαν νύκτα ἀπέδρη Id 6.2;τῆς κολοκύνθης.. ἣ ἐγενήθη ὑ. νύκτα καὶ ὑ. νύκτα ἀπώλετο LXXJn.4.10
: rarely with stress on the duration, πάνθ' ὑ. μηνιθμόν throughout its continuance, Il.16.202;ὑ. τὸν παρεόντα τόνδε πόλεμον Hdt.9.60
; οὐδὲν τῶν κατ' Αἴγυπτον ὑ. ταῦτα ἑτεροιωθῆναι during that time, Id.2.142;ὑ. τὸν χρόνον ὃν οἱ ἑξήκοντα καὶ τριηκόσιοι ἦρχον οἵδε ἐθεόρεον IG12(8).276.4
([place name] Thasos).2 also of Time, about, sts. more precisely at, and of events, about or at the time of, ὑπ' αὐτὸν τὸν χρόνον ὅτε .. Ar.Ach. 139, cf. Hdt.7.165;ὑπ' αὐτὸν τὸν καιρόν Plb. 11.27.4
, 16.15.8; ὑφ' ἕνα καιρόν at one time, Diog.Oen.38;ὑ. τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον Th.2.26
;ὑ. τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους Id.1.100
;ὑ. τὸν σεισμόν Id.2.27
, cf. Plb.4.33.5, Plu.Alex.14; ὑ. τὴν ἑωθινήν, ὑ. τὴν ὄρφνην, Plb. 18.19.5,7;ὑ. τὸν ὄρθρον Act.Ap.5.21
, Gp.2.4.3; ποιεῖσθαι τοὺς περιπάτους ὑ. τὸ ψῦχος in the cool of the morning, Plb.5.56.10; ὑφ' ἓν πάντες all at once, at the same time, Arr.Epict.3.22.33, cf. S.E.M. 10.124, Sor.1.103, al.; παιδάριον ὑ. τὴν ἀναπνοὴν ἑπτὰ καὶ πέντε στίχους συνεῖρον in one breath, Plb.10.47.9; ὑφ' ἓν ἐκτρῖψαι at one blow, LXX Wi.12.9; ὑ. μίαν ἄρσιν καὶ θέσιν ἀνατείνοντες καὶ κατατιθέμενοι, of a squad of diggers, Gp.2.45.5; ὑ. μίαν φωνήν Aristeas 178; πῶς γὰρ ἂν ὑ. τὰς αὐτὰς ἡμέρας ἔν τε τῇ Ἰταλίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Κιλικίᾳ.. πολεμήσειε; at the same time, D.C.36.35; sts. c. part., ὑ. τὸν νηὸν κατακαέντα at the time of its burning, Hdt.1.51; ὑ. τὴν κατάλυσιν τοῦ πολέμου just at the end, X.Mem.2.8.1, cf. Plu.Mar.46; ὑ. τὸν θυμὸν ἐκ χειρὸς ἐπιστρατευσαμένων at the very time of their anger, Plb. 2.19.10;ὑ. παροξυσμόν Gal.19.215
; παραδόντω τοῖς αἱρεθεῖσι εἰς τὸν ὑπ' αὐτὰ (or ὕπαυτα as Adv. = ἑξῆς)ἐνιαυτόν IG9(1).694.60
(Corc., ii/i B.C.);ὑ. κύνα Arist.HA 547a14
, Thphr.CP1.13.3, D.S.19.109;ὑ. τὰς θερινὰς [τροπὰς] καὶ τοῦ κυνὸς τὴν ἐπιτολήν Gp.2.6.17
.IV of accompaniment,ὑπὸ ὄρχησίν τε καὶ ᾠδήν Pl.Lg. 670a
;ὑ. αὐλὸν διαλέγεσθαι X.Smp.6.3
codd. (ὑ. τοῦ αὐλοῦ Cobet); ὑ. κήρυκα (v.κῆρυξ 1.3
).—Compare A.11.5, B.11.4.2 ὄνον ἕνα ὑ. λαχανόσπερμον laden with.., Meyer Ostr.81.2 (i A. D.), cf. PFay.p.324 (i A.D.); , al. (iii A.D.); cf. supr. A.11.8.D POSITION: ὑ. can follow its Subst., becoming by anastrophe ὕπο. It is freq. separated from the Subst. by intervening words, as in Il.2.465, Od.5.320, 7.130:— ὑπαί is placed after its case in A. Eu. 417, S.El. 1418, Inach. l.c., although acc. to Hdn.Gr.1.480 it cannot suffer anastrophe.E AS ADV., under, below, beneath, freq. in Hom.; esp. of young animals, under the mother, i.e. at the breast, Od.4.636, 21.23.2 behind, Hdt.7.61: cf. C. 1.II ὑπ' ἐκ or ὑπέκ, v. ὑπέκ.—In Hom. the separation of the Prep. from its Verb by tmesis is very freq., and sts. it follows, in which case it suffers anastrophe,φυγὼν ὕπο νηλεὲς ἦμαρ Od.9.17
.F IN COMPOSITION:I under, as well of rest as of motion, as in ὕπειμι, ὑποβαίνω, etc.3 of the agency or influence under which a thing is done, to express subjection or subordination, ὑποδαμνάω, ὑποδμώς, ὑφηνίοχος, cf. ἐπί G. 111. -
10 δαιμόνιον
δαιμόνιον, ου, τό (substant. neut. of the adj. δαιμόνιος [s. 2 below δαιμόνιον πνεῦμα], quotable since Homer; OGI 383, 175; Herm. Wr. 10, 19; Ps.-Phoc. 101; En 19:1; TestSol; GrBar 16:3; Philo; Jos., Bell. 1, 373; 6, 429) in Gk. lit. the δαιμον-family refers in general to powerful entities that transcend ordinary experience. After Homer’s time, the adj. δαιμόνιος means anything ‘sent from heaven’ or ‘that which is divine’ and the subst. τὸ δ. comes to mean ‘divine manifestation’ or ‘heaven’, as in our expression ‘what heaven decrees’ (Hdt. 5, 87, 2; cp. SIG 601, 15; Jos., Bell. 1, 69); or simply ‘the divine’ (Eur., Bacch. 894); cp. SIG 545, 14 (of religious piety). In our lit. the subst. gener. denotes a malevolent force.① transcendent incorporeal being w. status between humans and deities, daemon (as distinguished from demon, which in Eng. gener. connotes inimical aspect), semi-divine being, a divinity, spirit, (higher) power, without neg. connotation. The subst. was freq. used by Hellenes in a gener. sense esp. of independent numinous beings or divinities, as distinguished from a more personalized θεός, e.g. nymphs, Panes, and Sileni (Pla., Symp. 23 p. 202e πᾶν τὸ δαιμόνιον μεταξύ ἐστι θεοῦ τε καὶ θνητοῦ=‘every δ. is between a god and a mortal’; cp. Philo, Mos. 1, 276; UPZ 144, 43; 50 [164 B.C.]; Vett. Val. 355, 15; Ps.-Lucian, Asinus 24 p. 592 οὐδὲ τὰ δ. δέδοικας; ‘aren’t you afraid of the spirits [powers]?’ The term is common in adjurations, e.g., δαιμόνιον πνεῦμα, w. ref. to the spirit of the departed as possessing extraordinary powers: lead tablet fr. Hadrumetum [Dssm., B 26, 35 (BS 271ff)]; PGM 4, 3038; 3065; 3075). ξένων δ. καταγγελεύς a preacher of strange divinities Ac 17:18 (cp. Pla., Apol. 26b; X., Mem. 1, 1, 1 καινὰ δαιμόνια εἰσφέρειν).② a hostile transcendent being w. status between humans and deities, spirit, power, hostile divinity, evil spirit, the neg. component may be either specific or contextual, and w. the sense commonly associated w. the loanword ‘demon’ (δ. φαῦλα: Chrysipp. [Stoic. II 338, 32, no. 1178]; Plut., Mor. 1051c. φαῦλ. δ.: Plut., Mor. 277a, Dio 2, 5. Vett. Val. 67, 5; 99, 7. Herm. Wr. 9, 3; PGM 4, 3081; 5, 120; 165; 170; LXX; En 19:1). Beings of this type are said to enter into persons and cause illness, esp. of the mental variety (GrBar 16:3 ἐν μαχαίρᾳ … ἐν δαιμονίοις as punishment; Jos., Bell. 7, 185 [of the spirits of deceased wicked people], Ant. 6, 166ff; 211; 214; 8, 45ff): δ. εἰσέρχεται εἴς τινα Lk 8:30; δ. ἔχειν Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; 8:27; J 7:20; 8:48f, 52; 10:20. ἔχων πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου who was under the control of an unclean power Lk 4:33. ῥῖψαν αὐτὸν τὸ δ. vs. 35; cp. ἔρρηξεν 9:42. Hence the healing of a sick person is described as the driving out of malignant forces ἐκβάλλειν (τ.) δ. (Jos., Ant. 6, 211) Mt 7:22; 9:34; 10:8; 12:24, 27f; Mk 1:34, 39; 3:15, 22; 6:13; 7:26; 9:38; 16:9, 17; Lk 9:49; 11:14f, 18ff; 13:32. Pass. Mt 9:33. ἐξουσίαν ἐπὶ πάντα τὰ δ. Lk 9:1. τὰ δʼ ὑποτάσσεται ἡμῖν 10:17. ἐξέρχεται τὸ δ. (s. ἐξέρχομαι 1aβב.—Thrasyllus [I A.D.] in Ps.-Plut., Fluv. 16, 2 ἀπέρχεται τὸ δαιμόνιον) Mt 17:18; Mk 7:29f; Lk 4:41; 8:2, 33, 35, 38. Some live in deserted places 8:29, hence a ruined city is a habitation of (malevolent) powers Rv 18:2 (cp. Is 13:21; 34:11, 14; Bar 4:35). Their ruler is βεελζεβούλ (q.v.) Mt 12:24, 27; Lk 11:15, 18f. Erroneous instruction is διδασκαλίαι δαιμονίων (subj. gen.) 1 Ti 4:1. The ability of such beings to work miracles is variously described J 10:21 and Rv 16:14. They are objects of polytheistic worship 9:20 (Dt 32:17; Bar 4:7; cp. Ps 95:5; 105:37; En 19:1; 99:7; Just., Tat.; SibOr Fgm. 1, 22. Likew. among Persians and Babylonians: Cumont3 305, 97) 1 Cor 10:20f (w. satirical reference to the secondary status of these members of the spirit-world relative to deity); B 16:7. On Js 2:19 s. φρίσσω.—Of the evil spirit of slander Hm 2:3; of vengeance Hs 9, 23, 5; of arrogance Hs 9, 22, 3.—The δ. can appear without a tangible body, and then acts as a phantom or ghost ISm 3:2.—JGeffcken, Zwei griech. Apologeten 1907, 216ff; JTambornino, De Antiquorum Daemonismo 1909; RWünsch, D. Geisterbannung im Altertum: Festschr. Univ. Breslau 1911, 9–32; WBousset, Z. Dämonologie d. späteren Antike: ARW 18, 1915, 134–72; FAndres, Daimon: Pauly-W. Suppl. III 1918, 267–322; MPohlenz, Stoa ’49 (index).—HDuhm, D. bösen Geister im AT 1904; GBarton, EncRelEth IV 1911, 594–601; AJirku, Die Dämonen u. ihre Abwehr im AT 1912; ALods, Marti Festschr. 1925, 181–93; HKaupel, D. Dämonen im AT 1930; Bousset, Rel.3 1926, 331ff; Billerb. IV 1928, 501–35; TCanaan, M.D., Dämonenglaube im Lande der Bibel 1929 1–20.—WAlexander, Demonic Possession in the NT 1902; JSmit, De Daemonicis in Hist. Evang. 1913; RBultmann, Gesch. d. Syn. Tradition2 ’31, 223ff; HEberlein, NKZ 42, ’31, 499–509; 562–72; FFenner, D. Krankheit im NT 1930; ATitius, NBonwetsch Festschr. 1918, 25–47; GSulzer, D. Besessenheitsheilungen Jesu 1921; HSeng, D. Heilungen Jesu in med. Beleuchtung2 1926; WWrede, Z. Messiaserkenntnis d. Dämonen bei Mk: ZNW 5, 1904, 169–77; OBauernfeind, D. Worte d. Dämonen im Mk-Ev. 1928; AFridrichsen, Theology 21, ’31, 122–35; SMcCasland, By the Finger of God ’51; SEitrem, Some Notes on the Demonology in the NT: SymbOsl, Suppl. 12, ’50, 1–60; JKallas, The Satanward View (Paul), ’66; GTillesse, Le Secret Messianique dans Mk, ’68, 75–111; RAC IX 546–797; RMacMullen, VigChr 37, ’83, 174–92; G. Francois, Le polythéisme et l’emploi au singulier des mots ΘΕΟΣ ΔΑΙΜΩΝ ’57 (lit.); GRiley, Demon: DDD 445–55. S. also the lit. s.v. ἄγγελος.—B. 1488. DELG s.v. δαίμων. M-M. TW. -
11 ζυγός
ζυγός, οῦ, ὁ (Hom. Hymns, Cer. 217 and prose since Pla., Tim. 63b; Polyb., Epict.; PFay 121, 4 εἰς τὸν ζ.; PStras 32, 12; LXX [Thackeray p. 154]; En 103:11; PsSol 7:9 [acc. without art.]; 17:30; TestAbr A 12f [Stone p. 30, 6 al.]; Just., D. 53, 1; Ath., R. 58, 22 [? acc. without art.]) for Attic τὸ ζυγόν (Hom. et al.; pap; Gignac II 97; Jos., Ant. 12, 194; Just., D. 88, 8 [but ζυγούς GThGk A 13, 1: Ea 152]).① a frame used to control working animals or, in the case of humans, to expedite the bearing of burdens, yoke in our lit. only fig. of any burden: ζ. δουλείας yoke of slavery (Soph., Aj. 944; cp. Hdt. 7, 8, γ3; Pla., Leg. 6, 770e; Demosth. 18, 289; Gen 27:40) Gal 5:1. ὑπὸ ζυγὸν δοῦλοι slaves under the yoke (i.e. under the y. of sl.) 1 Ti 6:1. ζυγὸς ἀνάγκης yoke of necessity (Eur., Or. 1330) B 2:6. Of the teaching of Jesus Mt 11:29f (cp. Sir 51:26, also 6:24–28; THaering, Mt 11:28–30: ASchlatter Festschr. 1922, 3–15; TArvedson, D. Mysterium Christi ’37, 174–200; HBetz, JBL 86, ’67, 10–24); D 6:2. ὑπὸ τὸν ζυγὸν τῆς χάριτος ἔρχεσθαι come under the yoke of grace 1 Cl 16:17 (opp. ViDa 7 [p. 77, 12 Sch.] ὑπὸ ζ. γίνονται τοῦ Βελίαρ). ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τ. τράχηλόν τινος put a yoke on the neck of someone Ac 15:10 (sim. expr. have become formal since Hes., Op. 815; Orph. Hymns 59, 5; Zosimus, Hist. 2, 37, 8; SibOr 3, 448). From this mng. it is a short step to application of such a balancing structure to② an instrument for determining weight, scale. The context of Rv 6:5 requires this mng., even though the gender of ζ. cannot be definitely determined. In older Gk. the neuter and apparently preferred form τὸ ζυγόν refers to the ‘lever of a balance’ (Aeschyl., Suppl. 822), then ‘balance, pair of scales’ (Pla. et al.; s. LXX in Thackeray, loc. cit.; Michel 1222, 4 [II B.C.]; but masc. TestAbr A).—B. 726. DELG s.v. ζεύγνυμι III. Frisk s.v. ζυγόν. M-M. TW. -
12 λαμβάνω
λαμβάνω (Hom.+) impf. ἐλάμβανον; fut. λήμψομαι (PTurin II, 3, 48; POxy 1664, 12; on the μ s. Mayser 194f; Thackeray 108ff; B-D-F §101; W-S. §5, 30; Mlt-H. 106; 246f; Reinhold 46f; WSchulze, Orthographica 1894.—On the middle s. B-D-F §77); 2 aor. ἔλαβον, impv. λάβε (B-D-F §101 p. 53 s.v. λαμβάνειν; W-S. §6, 7d; Mlt-H. 209 n. 1), impv. 3 pl. λαβέτωσαν (LXX; GJs 4:2); pf. εἴληφα (DRinge, Glotta 62, ’84, 125–28), 2 sing. εἴληφας and εἴληφες Rv 11:17 v.l. (W-S. §13, 16 note; Mlt-H. 221), ptc. εἰληφώς. Pass.: fut. 3 pl. ληφθήσονται Jdth 6:9; aor. εἰλήφθην LXX; pf. 3 sing. εἴληπται; plpf. 3 sg. εἴληπτο (Just., D. 132, 3). For Attic inscriptional forms s. Threatte II 645. In the following divisions, nos. 1–9 focus on an active role, whereas 10 suggests passivity.① to get hold of someth. by laying hands on or grasping someth., directly or indirectly, take, take hold of, grasp, take in hand ἄρτον (Diod S 14, 105, 3 ῥάβδον; TestSol 2:8 D τὴν σφραγῖδα; TestJob 23:10 ψαλίδα) Mt 26:26a; Mk 14:22a; Ac 27:35. τ. βιβλίον (Tob 7:14) Rv 5:8f. τ. κάλαμον Mt 27:30. λαμπάδας take (in hand) (Strattis Com. [V B.C.], Fgm. 37 K. λαβόντες λαμπάδας) 25:1, 3. λαβέτωσαν ἀνὰ λαμπάδα GJs 7:2. μάχαιραν draw the sword (Gen 34:25; Jos., Vi. 173 [cp. JosAs 23:2 τὴν ῥομφαίαν]) Mt 26:52. Abs. λάβετε take (this) Mt 26:26b; Mk 14:22b.— Take hold of (me) GHb 356, 39=ISm 3:2.—ἔλαβέ με ἡ μήτηρ μου τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα ἐν μιᾷ τῶν τριχῶν μου my mother, the Holy Spirit, took me by one of my hairs GHb 20, 63. Ἐλισάβεδ … λαβουμένη (λαβοῦσα codd.) αὐτὸν ἀνέβη ἐν τῇ ὀρεινῇ E. took (John) and went up into the hill-country GJs 22:3. λαβών is somet. used somewhat pleonastically to enliven the narrative, as in Hom. (Od. 24, 398) and dramatists (Soph., Oed. R. 1391 et al.), but also in accord w. Hebr. usage (JViteau, Étude sur le Grec du NT 1893, 191; Dalman, Worte 16ff; Wlh., Einleitung2 1911, 14; B-D-F §419, 1 and 2; s. Rob. 1127; s., e.g., ApcBar 2:1 λαβών με ἤγαγε; Josh 2:4; Horapollo 2, 88 τούτους λαβὼν κατορύττει) Mt 13:31, 33; Mk 9:36; Lk 13:19, 21; J 12:3; Ac 9:25; 16:3; Hs 5, 2, 4. The ptc. can here be rendered by the prep. with (B-D-F §418, 5; Rob. 1127) λαβὼν τὴν σπεῖραν ἔρχεται he came with a detachment J 18:3 (cp. Soph., Trach. 259 στρατὸν λαβὼν ἔρχεται; ApcrEsd 6, 17 p. 31, 24 Tdf. λαβὼν … στρατιὰν ἀγγέλων). λαβὼν τὸ αἷμα … τὸν λαὸν ἐρράντισε with the blood he sprinkled the people Hb 9:19 (cp. ParJer 9:32 λαβόντες τὸν λίθον ἔθηκαν ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα αὐτοῦ ‘they crowned his tomb with a stone’; Mel., P. 14, 88 λαβόντες δὲ τὸ … αἶμα). Different is the periphrastic aor. ptc. use of λ. w. ἔχει: Dg 10:6 ἃ παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ λαβὼν ἔχει what the pers. has received fr. God (cp. Eur., Bacchae 302 μεταλαβὼν ἔχει; Goodwin §47; Gildersleeve, Syntax §295; Schwyzer I, 812). Freq. parataxis takes the place of the ptc. constr. (B-D-F §419, 5) ἔλαβε τὸν Ἰησοῦν καὶ ἐμαστίγωσεν (instead of λαβὼν τ. Ἰ. ἐ.) he had Jesus scourged J 19:1. λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον … καὶ βαλεῖν throw the bread Mt 15:26; Mk 7:27. ἔλαβον τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐποίησαν τέσσερα μέρη they divided his garments into four parts J 19:23.—In transf. sense ἀφορμὴν λ. find opportunity Ro 7:8, 11 (s. ἀφορμή); ὑπόδειγμα λ. take as an example Js 5:10; so also λ. alone, λάβωμεν Ἐνώχ 1 Cl 9:3.—Of the cross as a symbol of the martyr’s death take upon oneself Mt 10:38 (cp. Pind., P. 2, 93 [171] λ. ζυγόν). We may class here ἔλαβεν τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ he put his clothes on J 13:12 (cp. Hdt. 2, 37; 4, 78; GrBar 9:7 τὸν ὄφιν ἔλαβεν ἔνδυμα). Prob. sim. μορφὴν δούλου λ. put on the form of a slave Phil 2:7.—Of food and drink take (cp. Bel 37 Theod.) Mk 15:23. ὅτε ἔλαβεν τὸ ὄξος J 19:30; λαβὼν τροφὴν ἐνίσχυσεν Ac 9:19; τροφὴν … λα[βεῖν] AcPl Ha 1, 19. (βρέφος) ἔλαβε μασθὸν ἐκ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Μαρίας (the infant) took the breast of his mother Mary GJs 19:2.—1 Ti 4:4 (s. 10b below) could also belong here.② to take away, remove (τὴν ψυχήν ApcEsdr 6:16 p. 31, 23 Tdf.) with or without the use of force τὰ ἀργύρια take away the silver coins (fr. the temple) Mt 27:6. τὰς ἀσθενείας diseases 8:17. τὸν στέφανον Rv 3:11. τὴν εἰρήνην ἐκ τῆς γῆς remove peace from the earth 6:4 (λ. τι ἐκ as UPZ 125, 13 ὸ̔ εἴληφεν ἐξ οἴκου; 2 Ch 16:2; TestSol 4:15 D; TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 12 [Stone p. 70]; Mel., P. 55, 403).③ to take into one’s possession, take, acquire τὶ someth. τὸν χιτῶνα Mt 5:40. οὐδὲ ἕν J 3:27. ἑαυτῷ βασιλείαν obtain kingly power for himself Lk 19:12 (cp. Jos., Ant. 13, 220). λ. γυναῖκα take a wife (Eur., Alc. 324; X., Cyr. 8, 4, 16; Gen 4:19; 6:2; Tob 1:9; TestSol 26:1; TestJob 45:3; ParJer 8:3; Jos., Ant. 1, 253; Just., D. 116, 3; 141, 4) Mk 12:19–21; 22 v.l.; Lk 20:28–31 (s. also the vv.ll. in 14:20 and 1 Cor 7:28). Of his life, that Jesus voluntarily gives up, in order to take possession of it again on his own authority J 10:18a. [ἀπολείπ]ετε τὸ σκότος, λάβεται τὸ φῶς [abandon] the darkness, seize the light AcPl Ha 8, 32. ἑαυτῷ τ. τιμὴν λ. take the honor upon oneself Hb 5:4.—Lay hands on, seize w. acc. of the pers. who is seized by force (Hom. et al.; LXX; mid. w. gen. Just., A II, 2, 10, D. 105, 3) Mt 21:35, 39; Mk 12:3, 8. Of an evil spirit that seizes the sick man Lk 9:39 (cp. PGM 7, 613 εἴλημπται ὑπὸ τοῦ δαίμονος; TestSol 17:2 εἰ λήμψομαί τινα, εὐθέως ἀναιρῶ αὐτὸν τῷ ξίφει; Jos., Ant. 4, 119 ὅταν ἡμᾶς τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ λάβῃ πνεῦμα; Just., A I, 18, 4 ψυχαῖς ἀποθανόντων λαμβανόμενοι).—Esp. of feelings, emotions seize, come upon τινά someone (Hom. et al.; Ex 15:15; Wsd 11:12; Jos., Ant. 2, 139; 14, 57) ἔκστασις ἔλαβεν ἅπαντας amazement seized (them) all Lk 5:26. φόβος 7:16. Sim. πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 Cor 10:13.—Of hunting and fishing: catch (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 9; Aelian, VH 4, 14) οὐδέν Lk 5:5=J 21:6 v.l. Fig. εἴ τις λαμβάνει (ὑμᾶς) if someone puts something over on you, takes advantage of you 2 Cor 11:20 (the exx. cited in Field, Notes, 184f refer to material plunder, whereas Paul appears to point to efforts of his opposition to control the Corinthians’ thinking for their own political purposes; also s. CLattey, JTS 44, ’43, 148); in related vein δόλῳ τινὰ λ. catch someone by a trick 12:16.④ to take payment, receive, accept, of taxes, etc. collect the two-drachma tax Mt 17:24; tithes Hb 7:8f; portion of the fruit as rent Mt 21:34. τὶ ἀπό τινος someth. fr. someone (Plut., Mor. 209d, Aem. Paul. 5, 9) 17:25. παρὰ τῶν γεωργῶν λ. ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν collect a share of the fruit fr. the vinedressers Mk 12:2.—τὶ παρά τινος someth. fr. someone (Aristarch. Sam. p. 352, 4; Jos., Ant. 5, 275; Just., D. 22, 11; Tat. 19, 1) οὐ παρὰ ἀνθρώπου τὴν μαρτυρίαν λ. the testimony which I receive is not from a human being or I will not accept mere human testimony (PSI 395, 6 [241 B.C.] σύμβολον λαβὲ παρʼ αὐτῶν=have them give you a receipt) J 5:34; cp. vs. 44; 3:11, 32f.⑤ to include in an experience, take up, receive τινὰ someone εἰς into (Wsd 8:18) lit. εἰς τὸ πλοῖον take someone (up) into the boat J 6:21. εἰς οἰκίαν receive someone into one’s house 2J 10. εἰς τὰ ἴδια into his own home J 19:27. Receive someone in the sense of recognizing the other’s authority J 1:12; 5:43ab; 13:20abcd.—οἱ ὑπηρέται ῥαπίσμασιν αὐτὸν ἔλαβον Mk 14:65 does not mean ‘the servants took him into custody with blows’ (BWeiss, al.), but is a colloquialism (s. B-D-F §198, 3, w. citation of AcJo 90 [Aa II 196, 1] τί εἰ ῥαπίσμασίν μοι ἔλαβες; ‘what if you had laid blows on me?’) the servants treated him to blows (Moffatt: ‘treated him to cuffs and slaps’), or even ‘got’ him w. blows, ‘worked him over’ (perh. a Latinism; Cicero, Tusc. 2, 14, 34 verberibus accipere. B-D-F §5, 3b; s. Rob. 530f); the v.l. ἔβαλον is the result of failure to recognize this rare usage. καλῶς ἔλαβόν σε; have (the young women) treated you well? Hs 9, 11, 8.⑥ to make a choice, choose, select πᾶς ἀρχιερεὺς ἐξ ἀνθρώπων λαμβανόμενος who is chosen fr. among human beings Hb 5:1 (cp. Num 8:6; Am 2:11; Just., D. 130, 3). The emphasis is not on gender but the human status of the chief priest in contrast to that of the unique Messiah vs. 5.⑦ to accept as true, receive τὶ someth. fig. τὰ ῥήματά τινος receive someone’s words (and use them as a guide) J 12:48; 17:8; AcPl Ha 1, 6 (s. καρδία 1bβ). τὸν λόγον receive the teaching Mt 13:20; Mk 4:16 (for μετὰ χαρᾶς λ. cp. PIand 13, 18 ἵνα μετὰ χαρᾶς σε ἀπολάβωμεν).⑧ to enter into a close relationship, receive, make one’s own, apprehend/comprehend mentally or spiritually (Soph., Pla. et al.) of the mystical apprehension of Christ (opp. κατελήμφθην ὑπὸ Χριστοῦ) ἔλαβον (i.e. Χριστόν) I have made (him) my own Phil 3:12.⑨ Special uses: the OT is the source of λαμβάνειν πρόσωπον show partiality/favoritism (s. πρόσωπον 1bα end) Lk 20:21; Gal 2:6; B 19:4; D 4:3.—θάρσος λ. take courage s. θάρσος; πεῖράν τινος λ. try someth. (Pla., Prot. 342a; 348a, Gorg. 448a; X., Cyr. 6, 1, 28; Polyb. 1, 75, 7; 2, 32, 5; 5, 100, 10; Aelian, VH 12, 22; Dt 28:56; Jos., Ant. 8, 166; diff. Dio Chrys. 50, 6) Hb 11:29 (this expr. has a different mng. in vs. 36; s. 10b below).—συμβούλιον λαμβάνειν consult (with someone), lit. ‘take counsel’, is a Latinism (consilium capere; s. B-D-F §5, 3b; Rob. 109) Mt 27:7; 28:12; w. ὅπως foll. 22:15; foll. by κατά τινος against someone and ὅπως 12:14; foll. by κατά τινος and ὥστε 27:1. οὐ λήψῃ βουλὴν πονηρὰν κατὰ τοῦ πλησίον σου D 2:6.⑩ to be a receiver, receive, get, obtainⓐ abs. λαβών (of a hungry hog) when it has received someth. B 10:3. (Opp. αἰτεῖν, as Appian, Fgm. [I p. 532–36 Viereck-R.] 23 αἰτεῖτε καὶ λαμβάνετε; PGM 4, 2172) Mt 7:8; Lk 11:10; J 16:24. (Opp. διδόναι as Thu. 2, 97, 4 λαμβάνειν μᾶλλον ἢ διδόναι; Ael. Aristid. 34 p. 645 D.; Herm. Wr. 5, 10b; Philo, Deus Imm. 57; SibOr 3, 511) Mt 10:8; Ac 20:35; B 14:1; but in D 1:5 λ. rather has the ‘active’ sense accept a donation (as ἵνα λάβῃ ἐξουσίαν TestJob 8:2).ⓑ w. acc. of thing τὶ someth. (Da 2:6; OdeSol 11:4 σύνεσιν; TestJob 24:9 τρεῖς ἄρτους al.; ApcEsdr 5:13 p. 30, 11 Tdf. τὴν ψυχήν) τὸ ψωμίον receive the piece of bread J 13:30. ὕδωρ ζωῆς δωρεάν water of life without cost Rv 22:17. μισθόν (q.v. 1 and 2a) Mt 10:41ab; J 4:36; 1 Cor 3:8, 14; AcPlCor 2:36 (TestSol 1:2, 10). Money: ἀργύρια Mt 28:15; ἀνὰ δηνάριον a denarius each Mt 20:9f. ἐλεημοσύνην Ac 3:3. βραχύ τι a little or a bite J 6:7; eternal life Mk 10:30 (Jos., C. Ap. 2, 218 βίον ἀμείνω λαβεῖν); the Spirit (schol. on Plato 856e ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα) J 7:39; Ac 2:38; cp. Gal 3:14; 1 Cor 2:12; 2 Cor 11:4; forgiveness of sin Ac 10:43 (Just., D. 54, 1); grace Ro 1:5; cp. 5:17; the victor’s prize 1 Cor 9:24f; the crown of life Js 1:12 (cp. Wsd 5:16 λ. τὸ διάδημα). συμφύγιον/σύμφυτον καὶ ὅπλον εὐδοκίας λάβωμεν Ἰησοῦν χριστόν the sense of this clause, restored from AcPl Ha 8, 23–24 and AcPl Ox 1602, 33–35 (=BMM recto 29–31) emerges as follows: and let us take Jesus Christ as our refuge/ally and shield, the assurance of God’s goodwill toward us. The early and late rain Js 5:7. ἔλεος receive mercy Hb 4:16 (Just., D. 133, 1). λ. τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ υἱοῦ (θεοῦ) receive the name of the Son of God (in baptism) Hs 9, 12, 4. διάδοχον receive a successor Ac 24:27 (cp. Pliny the Younger, Ep. 9, 13 successorem accipio). τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ λαβέτω ἕτερος let another man receive his position 1:20 (Ps 108:8). τόπον ἀπολογίας λ. (τόπος 4) 25:16. λ. τι μετὰ εὐχαριστίας receive someth. w. thankfulness 1 Ti 4:4 (but s. 1 above, end.—On the construction with μετά cp. Libanius, Or. 63 p. 392, 3 F. μετὰ ψόγου λ.). τί ἔχεις ὅ οὐκ ἔλαβες; what have you that you did not receive? 1 Cor 4:7 (Alciphron 2, 6, 1 τί οὐ τῶν ἐμῶν λαβοῦσα ἔχεις;). Of punishments (cp. δίκην λ. Hdt. 1, 115; Eur., Bacch. 1312. ποινάς Eur., Tro. 360. πληγάς Philyllius Com. [V B.C.] 11 K.; GrBar 4:15 καταδίκην; Jos., Ant. 14, 336 τιμωρίαν) λ. περισσότερον κρίμα receive a punishment that is just so much more severe Mt 23:13 [14] v.l. (cp. κρίμα 4b); Mk 12:40; Lk 20:47; cp. Js 3:1. οἱ ἀνθεστηκότες ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται those who oppose will bring punishment upon themselves Ro 13:2. πεῖράν τινος λ. become acquainted with, experience, suffer someth. (X., An. 5, 8, 15; Polyb. 6, 3, 1; 28, 9, 7; 29, 3, 10; Diod S 12, 24, 4 τὴν θυγατέρα ἀπέκτεινεν, ἵνα μὴ τῆς ὕβρεως λάβῃ πεῖραν; 15, 88, 4; Jos., Ant. 2, 60; Preisigke, Griech. Urkunden des ägypt. Museums zu Kairo [1911] 2, 11; 3, 11 πεῖραν λ. δαίμονος) μαστίγων πεῖραν λ. Hb 11:36 (the phrase in a diff. mng. vs. 29; s. 9b above).ⓒ Also used as a periphrasis for the passive: οἰκοδομὴν λ. be edified 1 Cor 14:5. περιτομήν be circumcised J 7:23 (Just., D. 23, 5 al.). τὸ χάραγμα receive a mark = be marked Rv 14:9, 11; 19:20; 20:4. καταλλαγήν be reconciled Ro 5:11. ὑπόμνησίν τινος be reminded of = remember someth. 2 Ti 1:5 (Just., D 19, 6 μνήμην λαμβάνητε); λήθην τινὸς λ. forget someth. (Timocles Com. [IV B.C.], Fgm. 6, 5 K.; Aelian, VH 3, 18 end, HA 4, 35; Jos., Ant. 2, 163; 202; 4, 304; Just., D. 46, 5 ἵνα μὴ λήθη ὑμᾶς λαμβάνῃ τοῦ θεοῦ) 2 Pt 1:9; χαρὰν λ. experience joy, rejoice Hv 3, 13, 2 ; GJs 12:2; ἀρχὴν λ. be begun, have its beginning (Pla et al.; Polyb. 1, 12, 9; Sext. Emp., Phys. 1, 366; Aelian, VH 2, 28; 12, 53; Dio Chrys. 40, 7; Philo, Mos. 1, 81 τρίτον [σημεῖον] … τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ γίνεσθαι λαβὸν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ; Just., D. 46, 4 τὴν ἀρχὴν λαβούσης ἀπὸ Ἀβραὰμ τῆς περιτομῆς; Ath. 19, 2 ἑτέραν ἀρχὴν τοῦ κόσμου λαβόντος) Hb 2:3; ApcPt Rainer ln. 19.—λ. τι ἀπό τινος receive someth. from someone (Epict. 4, 11, 3 λ. τι ἀπὸ τῶν θεῶν; Herm. Wr. 1, 30; ApcMos 19 ὅτε δὲ ἔλαβεν ἀπʼ ἐμοῦ τὸν ὄρκον; Just., D. 78, 10 τῶν λαβόντων χάριν ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ) 1J 2:27; 3:22. Also τὶ παρά τινος (Pisander Epicus [VI B.C.] Fgm. 5 [in Athen. 11, 469d]; Diod S 5, 3, 4 λαβεῖν τι παρὰ τῶν θεῶν; TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 8 [Stone p. 12] λαβὼν τὴν εὐχὴν παρʼ αὐτῶν; Just., A I, 60, 3 ἐνέργειαν τὴν παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ λεγομένην λαβεῖν τὸν Μωυσέα.—παρά A3aβ) J 10:18b; Ac 2:33; 3:5; 20:24; Js 1:7; 2J 4; Rv 2:28. λ. τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος receive bail from Jason Ac 17:9 (s. ἱκανός 1). λ. τι ὑπό τινος be given someth. by someone 2 Cor 11:24. κλῆρον καὶ μερισμὸν λαμβάνοντες AcPl Ha 8, 18/Ox 1602, 22f [λαβόντες]=BMM recto 23f (s. κλῆρος 2). λ. τι ἔκ τινος receive someth. fr. a quantity of someth.: ἐκ τοῦ πληρώματος αὐτοῦ ἐλάβομεν χάριν from his fullness we have received favor J 1:16. ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος αὐτοῦ ἐλάβετε Hs 9, 24, 4.—λ. ἐξ ἀναστάσεως τοὺς νεκροὺς αὐτῶν (s. ἀνάστασις 2a) Hb 11:35. On ἐν γαστρὶ εἴληφα (LXX) GJs 4:2 and 4 s. γαστήρ 2 and συλλαμβάνω 3.—B. 743. Schmidt, Syn. III 203–33. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. -
13 ἄνθρωπος
ἄνθρωπος, ου, ὁ (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.; ἡ ἄνθρωπος [Hdt. 1, 60, 5] does not appear in our lit.) ‘human being, man, person’.① a person of either sex, w. focus on participation in the human race, a human beingⓐ ἐγεννήθη ἄ. J 16:21; εἰς χεῖρας ἀ. Mk 9:31; ψυχὴ ἀνθρώπου Ro 2:9; συνείδησις ἀ. 2 Cor 4:2; μέτρον ἀ. Rv 21:17.ⓑ in contrast to animals, plants, etc. Mt 4:19; 12:12; Mk 1:17; Lk 5:10; 1 Cor 15:39; 2 Pt 2:16; Rv 9:4, 7; 13:18 al. To angels (cp. Aristaen. 1, 24, end σάτυροι οὐκ ἄνθρωποι) 1 Cor 4:9; 13:1. To God (Aeschyl., Ag. 663 θεός τις οὐκ ἄνθ.; Aeschines 3, 137 θεοὶ κ. δαίμονες; Ael. Aristid. 30 p. 578 D.; Herm. Wr. 14, 8 θεοὺς κ. ἀνθρ.; οὐκ ἐλογίσατο ὅτι ἄ. ἐστιν PsSol 2:28) Hb 13:6 (Ps 117:6); Mt 10:32f; 19:6; Mk 10:9; J 10:33 (ἄνθ. ὤν=‘as a mortal human’, a favorite formula: X., An. 7, 6, 11; Menand., Epitr. 592 Kö.; Fgm.: 46; 395, 2 Kö; Comp. I 282; Alexis Com., Fgm. 150; Polyb. 3, 31, 3; Chariton 4, 4, 8 [WBlake ’38]; Heliod. 6, 9, 3; As early as Eur., Hipp. 472ff ἄνθρωπος οὖσα … κρείσσω δαιμόνων εἶναι θέλειν); Ac 10:26; 12:22; 14:11, 15; 1 Th 2:13; Phil 2:7. ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων human precepts Mt 15:9; Mk 7:7 (Is 29:13); w. οὐρανός (=God) Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30. ἀδύνατα παρὰ ἀνθρώποις Lk 18:27, cp. Mt 19:26. δοῦλοι ἀνθρώπων people’s slaves 1 Cor 7:23. πείθειν and ἀρέσκειν ἀ. Gal 1:10. μεσίτης θεοῦ καὶ ἀ. 1 Ti 2:5 al. θεὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους θέλει σωθῆναι 1 Ti 2:4 (cp. Epict. 3, 24, 2 ὁ θεὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους ἐπὶ τὸ εὐδαιμονεῖν ἐποίησεν).ⓒ in pl. w. gener. mng. (cp. Hom., Il. 21, 569; Od. 1, 351) οἱ ἄ. people, also one’s associates (Jos., Ant. 9, 28) Mt 5:13, 16; 6:1f, 5, 14, 18; 7:12; 8:27; 23:5; Mk 8:27 and often. οἱ τότε ἄ. the people of that time Pol 3:2.—οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων the offspring of human beings or simply human beings, people (Gen 11:5; 1 Esdr 4:37; Ps 10:4; En10:7 al.; PsSol 9:4) Mk 3:28; Eph 3:5. Sim. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀ. as a self-designation of Jesus but s. next, also 2a and υἱός 2dγ.ⓓ Jesus Christ is called ἄ. as one who identifies with humanity (cp. ὁ Σωτὴρ ἄ. γενόμενος Did., Gen. 41, 28) 1 Ti 2:5; Hb 2:6a (Ps 8:5a; cp. Just., A II, 6, 4). He is in contrast to Adam Ro 5:15; 1 Cor 15:21, the πρῶτος ἄ. 1 Cor 15:45, 47 (cp. Philo, Abr. 56; s. DDD 112) as δεύτερος ἄ. vs. 47. On the nature and origin of this concept cp. Ltzm. and JWeiss on 1 Cor 15:45ff; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 120 ff, Jesus der Herr 1916, 67ff; Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 343ff, Erlösungsmyst. 107ff; ARawlinson, The NT Doctrine of the Christ 1926, 124ff; BStegmann, Christ, the ‘Man from Heaven’, a Study of 1 Cor 15:45–47: The Cath. Univ., Washington 1927; CKraeling, Anthropos and Son of Man 1927. S. on Ἀδάμ and on οὐρανός 2b.—On ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀ. as a self-designation of Jesus s.c end, above, and υἱός 2dγ.② a member of the human race, w. focus on limitations and weaknesses, a human beingⓐ of physical aspect Js 5:17; subject to death Hb 9:27; Rv 8:11; Ro 5:12; sunken in sin (cp. fr. a different perspective Menand., Fgm. 432 Kö [499 K.] ἄνθρωπος ὢν ἥμαρτον; Herodas 5, 27 ἄνθρωπός εἰμι, ἥμαρτον; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1015–17a σὺ ἄνθρωπος εἶ, οἷς τὸ ἁμαρτάνειν γίνεται ῥᾳδίως; cp. Orig. C. Cels. 3, 62, 17) 5:18f al., hence judged to be inferior Gal 1:1, 11f; Col 2:8, 22 (Is 29:13) or even carefully to be avoided προσέχειν ἀπὸ τ. ἀ. beware of (evil) men Mt 10:17; cp. Lk 6:22, 26.ⓑ of status κατὰ ἄνθρωπον (Aeschyl., Sept. 425; Pla., Phileb. 370f; Diod S 16, 11, 2; Athen. 10, 444b; Plut., Mor. 1042a; Witkowski 8, 5 [252 B.C.]) in a human way, from a human standpoint emphasizes the inferiority of human beings in comparison w. God; λαλεῖν 1 Cor 9:8; λέγειν Ro 3:5; Gal 3:15; περιπατεῖν 1 Cor 3:3. κ. ἄ. ἐθηριομάχησα perh. like an ordinary man (opp. as a Christian sure of the resurrection) 15:32. Of the gospel οὐκ ἔστιν κ. ἄ. Gal 1:11. Pl. κ. ἀνθρώπους (opp. κ. θεόν) 1 Pt 4:6.③ a male person, manⓐ adult male, man (Pla., Prot. 6, 314e, Phd. 66, 117e; Gen. 24:26ff; PsSol 17:17; TestAbr A 3 p. 79, 25 [Stone p. 6]; ParJer 5:20) Mt 11:8; Lk 7:25. σκληρὸς εἶ ἄ. Mt 25:24; cp. Lk 19:21f. In contrast to woman (Achilles Tat. 5, 22, 2; PGM 36, 225f; 1 Esdr 9:40; Tob 6:8) Mt 19:5; prob. Lk 13:19 (cp. vs. 21); Eph 5:31 (both Gen 2:24); 1 Cor 7:1; Ox 840, 39.ⓑ married person husband Mt 19:10.ⓒ an immediate descendant son, opp. father (Sir 3:11) Mt 10:35.ⓓ a person owned and therefore under the control of another slave (X., Mem. 2, 1, 15, Vect. 4, 14; Herodas 5, 78; BGU 830, 4; POxy. 1067, 30; 1159, 16) Lk 12:36. οἱ τοῦ πυρὸς ἄ. the persons in charge of the fire MPol 15:1; ἄ. τοῦ μεγάλου βασιλέως AcPl Ha 9, 1 (Aa I 111, 10). Perh. J 6:7.④ practically equiv. to the indef. pron., w. the basic mng. of ἄ. greatly weakened (cp. 1c.) someone, one, a person.ⓐ without the art.α. used w. τὶς: ἐὰν γένηταί τινι ἀνθρώπῳ Mt 18:12. ἄνθρωπός τις κατέβαινεν a man was going down Lk 10:30. ἀνθρώπου τινὸς πλουσίου 12:16. ἄ. τις ἦν ὑδρωπικός 14:2, cp. vs. 16; 15:11; 16:1, 19; 19:12. ἦν τις ἄ. ἐκεῖ J 5:5. τινῶν ἀ. αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 Ti 5:24.β. without τὶς, and somet. nearly equiv. to it (Paus. 5, 7, 3 ἐξ ἀνθρώπου=from someone) εἷς ἄ.=εἷς τις an individual J 11:50, cp. 18:14. εἶδεν ἄνθρωπον καθήμενον he saw someone sitting Mt 9:9. ἰδοὺ ἄ. χεῖρα ἔχων ξηράν there was someone with a shriveled hand 12:10. λαβὼν ἄ. a person took 13:31; cp. Mk 1:23; 3:1; 4:26; 5:2; 7:11; 10:7 (Gen 2:24); Lk 2:25; 4:33; 5:18; 6:48f; 13:19; J 3:4, 27 al. Used w. negatives ἄ. οὐκ ἔχω I have nobody J 5:7. οὐδέποτε ἐλάλησεν οὕτως ἄ. nobody has ever spoken like that 7:46.γ. in indef. and at the same time general sense, oft.= one (Ger. man, Fr. on) οὕτως ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄ. lit. this is how one or a person (i.e. you) should regard us 1 Cor 4:1; cp. Mt 16:26; Ro 3:28; 1 Cor 7:26; 11:28; Gal 2:16; 6:7; Js 2:24.δ. w. relative foll. δεῦτε ἴδετε ἄ. ὸ̔ς εἶπέν μοι come and see someone who (contrast w. ἀνήρ vss. 16–18) told me J 4:29. ἄ. ὸ̔ς τὴν ἀλήθειαν ὑμῖν λελάληκα 8:40. For Ac 19:16 s. 6 below.ε. used pleonastically w. a noun (cp. usage s.v. ἀνήρ 1dα) (Il. 16, 263; Lev 21:9; Sir 8:1; 1 Macc 7:14) ἄ. φάγος a glutton Mt 11:19; Lk 7:34; ἄ. ἔμπορος a merchant Mt 13:45; ἄ. οἰκοδεσπότης vs. 52; 21:33; ἄ. βασιλεύς (Horapollo 2, 85; Jos., Ant. 6, 142) 18:23; 22:2; ἄ. θηριομάχος AcPl Ha 5, 30.—Likew. w. names indicating local or national origin (X., An. 6, 4, 23; Ex 2:11 ἄ. Αἰγύπτιος) ἄ. Κυρηναῖος a Cyrenaean Mt 27:32; ἄ. Ἰουδαῖος Ac 21:39; ἄ. Ῥωμαῖος 16:37; 22:25. W. adj., giving them the character of nouns (Menand., Fgm. 518 Kö ἄ. φίλος; PFlor 61, 60; PAmh 78, 13 ἄ. αὐθάδης; PStras 41, 40 πρεσβύτης ἄ. εἰμι; Sir 8:2 al.) ἄ. τυφλός (EpJer 36) a blind person J 9:1; ἄ. ἁμαρτωλός (Sir 11:32; 32:17) vs. 16; ἄ. αἱρετικός Tit 3:10. Likew. w. ptc. ἄ. σπείρων a sower Mt 13:24.ζ. pleonastic are also the combinations τίς ἄ.; who? Mt 7:9; Lk 15:4; πᾶς ἄ. (PsSol 2:9; 17:27 [both times after οὐ]; ParJer 8:7; cp. Just., D. 3) everyone J 2:10; Js 1:19; πάντες ἄ. all people Ac 22:15, everyone 1 Cor 7:7; εἷς ἄ. J 11:50; δύο ἄ. Lk 18:10. Likew. the partitive gen. ἀνθρώπων w. οὐδείς (cp. Mimnermus 1, 15f Diehl2 οὐ δέ τίς ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων) Mk 11:2; Lk 19:30, μηδείς Ac 4:17, τίς 19:35; 1 Cor 2:11.—MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 106f.ⓑ w. the generic art. (Wsd 2:23; 4 Macc 2:21; PsSol 5:16; Just., D. 20, 2) ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄ. the good person, opp. ὁ πονηρὸς ἄ. the evil person Mt 12:35. οὐκ ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ ζήσεται ὁ ἄ. no one can live on bread (Dt 8:3) 4:4. κοινοῖ τὸν ἄ. defiles a person 15:11, 18; cp. Mk 7:15, 20; τὸ σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄ. ἐγένετο 2:27; τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀ. J 2:25; κρίνειν τὸν ἄ. 7:51; ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀ. Ro 7:1; ὁ ποιήσας ἄ. everyone who does it 10:5 (Lev 18:5; 2 Esdr 19:29); κακὸν τῷ ἀ. τῷ διὰ προσκόμματος ἐσθίοντι wrong for anyone who eats w. misgivings Ro 14:20 al.ⓒ w. qualifying gen. ἄνθρωποι εὐδοκίας Lk 2:14 (εὐδοκία 1). ὁ ἄ. τῆς ἀνομίας (v.l. ἁμαρτίας) 2 Th 2:3. ἄ. (τοῦ) θεοῦ man of God 1 Ti 6:11; 2 Ti 3:17; 2 Pt 1:21 v.l. (3 Km 12:22; 13:1; 17:24; 4 Km 1:9ff; 2 Ch 8:14 al.; TestJob 53:4; EpArist 140; Philo, Gig. 61, Deus Imm. 138f. But also Sextus 2; 3; Herm. Wr. 1, 32; 13, 20; PGM 4, 1177, where no comma is needed betw. ἄ. and θ. Cp. Callim. 193, 37 [Pf.]).ⓐ the two sides of human nature as ὁ ἔξω ἄ. the outer being, i.e. human beings in their material, transitory, and sinful aspects 2 Cor 4:16, and, on the other hand, ὁ ἔσω ἄ. the inner being, i.e. humans in their transcendent significance, striving toward God Ro 7:22; 2 Cor 4:16; Eph 3:16 (cp. Pla., Rep. 9, 589a ὁ ἐντὸς ἄνθρωπος; Plotinus, Enn. 5, 1, 10 ὁ εἴσω ἄ.; Philo, Plant. 42 ὁ ἐν ἡμῖν πρὸς ἀλήθειαν ἄ., τουτέστιν ὁ νοῦς, Congr. Erud. Grat. 97, Det. Pot. Insid. 23; Zosimus in Rtzst., Poim. 104 ἔσω αὐτοῦ ἄνθρωπος πνευματικός. Cp. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 354f; WGutbrod, D. paulin. Anthropologie ’34; KSchäfer, FTillmann Festschr. ’34, 25–35; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 391–401). Similar in mng. is ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄ. the hidden person of the heart=ὁ ἔσω ἄ. 1 Pt 3:4.ⓑ from another viewpoint, w. contrast of παλαιὸς and καινὸς (νέος) ἄ. Ro 6:6; Eph 4:22, 24; Col 3:9 (cp. Dg 2:1; Jesus as καινὸς ἄ. IEph 20:1 is the new being, who is really God), or of ὁ ψυχικὸς ἄ. and ὁ πνευματικὸς ἄ. 1 Cor 2:14f (s. πνευματικός 2aγ). τὸν τέλειον ἄ. GMary 463, 27.⑥ a person who has just been mentioned in a narrative, w. the art. the person (Diod S 37, 18 ὁ ἄ. εἶπε; Just., A II, 2, 12) Mt 12:13; Mk 3:5; 5:8; J 4:50; Ac 19:16 al.⑦ a pers. perceived to be contemptible, a certain person w. a connotation of contempt (Diogenianus Epicureus [II A.D.] in Eus., PE 6, 8, 30 calls Chrysippus, his opponent, contemptuously ὁ ἄ.; Artem. 5, 67 ἡ ἄνθρωπος of a prostitute; UPZ 72, 6 [152 B.C.]; BGU 1208 I, 25; Plut., Mor 870c.—ASvensson [ὁ, ἡ, τό beg.]; AWilhelm, Anzeiger der Ak. d. W. in Wien, phil.-Hist. Kl. ’37 [XXIII–XXVI 83–86]) οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄ. I don’t know the fellow (of Jesus, as oft. in these exx.) Mt 26:72, 74; Mk 14:71. προσηνέγκατέ μοι τὸν ἄ. τοῦτον Lk 23:14; ὁ ἄ. οὕτος AcPl Ox 6, 18 (= Aa I 242, 1). εἰ ὁ ἄ. Γαλιλαῖός ἐστιν Lk 23:6. τίς ἐστιν ὁ ἄ. J 5:12. ἰδοὺ ὁ ἄ. here’s the fellow! 19:5 (on the attempt to arouse pity, cp. Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 68, 4 Jac., Cyrus in connection w. the downfall of Croesus; Diog. L. 2:13 Pericles in the interest of Anaxagoras, his teacher; Jos., Ant. 19, 35f). μὴ οἰέσθω ὁ ἄ. ἐκεῖνος such a person must not expect Js 1:7.⑧ in address, varying from a familiar tone to one that is more formal ἄνθρωπε friend (X., Cyr. 2, 2, 7; Plut., Mor. 553e) indicating a close relationship between the speaker and the one addressed Lk 5:20; sir Ἄνθρωπε, ποῦ πορεύῃ; ‘Sir, where are you going?’ GJs 19:1 (not pap), the woman is a stranger to Joseph. W. a reproachful connotation, man! (Diogenes the Cynic in Diog. L. 6, 56; Diod S 33, 7, 4; Chariton 6, 7, 9; Ps.-Callisth. 1, 31, 1) Lk 12:14; 22:58, 60; Hm 10, 1, 2 (ἄνθρωπος Joly). Also in rhetorical address, in a letter Ro 2:1, 3; 9:20 (Pla., Gorg. 452b σὺ δὲ … τίς εἶ, ὦ ἄνθρωπε); Js 2:20. (Cp. Pla., Apol. 16 p. 28b; Epict. index Schenkl; Mi 6:8; Ps 54:14.—JWackernagel, Über einige antike Anredeformen: Progr. Gött. 1912.)⑨ a heavenly being that looked like a person, a human figure of GPt 11:44 (cp. Just., D. 58, 10 ἐν ἰδέᾳ ἀνθρώπου [on Gen 32:25]; Tat. 21, 1 θεὸν ἐν ἀνθρώπου μορφῇ γεγονέναι).—JNielen, D. Mensch in der Verkünd. der Ev.: FTillmann Festschr. ’34, 14–24; Gutbrod op. cit. 2cα; WKümmel, Man in the NT, tr. JVincent, ’63; also Vock and Seiler ἀνήρ end.—B. 80. EDNT (lit.). DELG. M-M. TW. Sv. -
14 αὐτοτελής
αὐτο-τελής, ές,A ending in itself, complete in itself, , cf. Ocell.1.7;θεωρίαι αὐ. καὶ αὑτῶν ἕνεκα Arist.Pol. 1325b20
; esp. in Gramm.,λεκτόν Stoic.2.58
;λόγος A.D.Synt.3.5
, al.;ἀξίωμα S.E.M.8.79
;διάνοια Hdn.Fig.p.93S.
; ῥῆμα an intransitive verb, A.D.Synt.116.11; of unity, Theol.Ar.5, cf. Orph.Fr.247.10. Adv. -λῶς, opp. κατὰ συναφήν, independently, separately, Epicur.Ep.2p.36U.b perfect, complete, fully-grown, Nonn.D.7.154,al.2 self-sufficing,αὐ. καὶ ἀπροσδεᾶ φιλοσοφίας Plu.2.122e
; of personal character, independent,προχείρου ἀ. εὐβούλου Phld.Herc.1457.5
.3 absolute, with full powers,στρατηγός Plu.2.754d
, cf. D.C.52.22; αὐ. κρίνειν, opp. προανακρίνειν, Arist.Ath.3.5, cf. 53.2.4 final, without appeal,Hyp.
Eux.15;δίκη Hsch.
, Suid.;διαλήψεις Plb.3.4.4
; αὐ. πρὸς γνῶσιν καὶ σαφήνειαν ib.36.2;αἰτίαν Chrysipp.Stoic.2.292
. Adv. - λῶς at one's own discretion, arbitrarily,οὐκ αὐ. ἀλλ' ἀκριβῶς Lys.Fr. 38
, cf. Plb.3.29.3;ἂν αἱ φαντασίαι ποιῶσιν αὐ. τὰς συγκαταθέσεις Chrysipp.Stoic.2.291
; αὐ. διαιτᾶν control, govern absolutely, Phld.D. 1.22.Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > αὐτοτελής
-
15 γίγνομαι
γίγνομαι, [dialect] Ion. and after Arist. [full] γίνομαι [pron. full] [ῑ], ([dialect] Att. Inscrr. have γιγν- in fifth and fourth cent., cf. IG2.11.9, 1055.25, etc.); Thess. [full] γίνυμαι IG9(2).517.22; [dialect] Boeot. [full] γίνιουμαι ib.7.3303: [tense] fut. γενήσομαι: [tense] aor. ἐγενόμην (A , al. ([etym.] προ-) Decr.Byz. ap. D.18.90), [dialect] Ion. [ per.] 2sg.γένευ Il.5.897
, [ per.] 3sg.γενέσκετο Od.11.208
, , Sapph.16, Pi.P.3.87, Parm.8.20, IG4.492 ([place name] Mycenae), prob.in Scol. 19; [dialect] Ep. , Emp.98.5, Call.Jov.1.50, Theoc.14.27, etc. ([etym.] gṇ-το): [tense] pf.γέγονα Il.19.122
, etc.: [ per.] 3pl.γέγοναν Apoc.21.6
: [tense] plpf.ἐγεγόνει Lys.31.17
, etc.; [dialect] Ion.ἐγεγόνεε Hdt.2.2
; [dialect] Ep. forms (as if from [tense] pf. γέγᾰα), [ per.] 2pl.γεγάᾱτε Batr.143
;γεγάᾱσι Il.4.325
, freq. in Od.: [ per.] 3pl. γεγᾱκᾰσιν cj. in Emp.23.10: [ per.] 3 dual [tense] plpf. ἐκ-γεγάτην [ᾰ] Od.10.138; inf. γεγάμεν [ᾰ] Pi.O.9.110, ([etym.] ἐκ) Il.5.248, etc.; part. γεγᾰώς -ᾰυῖα, pl.-ᾰῶτες, -ᾰυῖαι Hom.
, etc., [var] contr.γεγώς, -ῶσα S.Aj. 472
, E.Med. 406; inf.γεγᾱκειν Pi.O.6.49
: [voice] Med. forms ἐκγεγάασθε Epigr.Hom.16, ἐκ-γεγάονται (in [tense] fut. sense) h.Ven. 197 (s.v.l.):—[voice] Pass. forms, [tense] fut. γενηθήσομαι (only in Pl.Prm. 141e, οὔτε γενήσεται, οὔτε γενηθήσεται, cf. Procl.in Prm.p.963 S.): [tense] aor.ἐγενήθην Epich.209
, Archyt.1, Hp.Epid.6.8.32,7.3, later [dialect] Att., Philem. 95.2 and 167, IG2.630b10 (i B. C.) and Hellenistic Gk., Plb.2.67.8, D.S.13.51: [tense] pf.γεγένημαι Simon.69
, freq. in [dialect] Att. Poets and Prose, in [dialect] Att. inscr. first in cent. iv, IG2.555: [ per.] 3pl.γεγενέανται Philet.
ap.Eust.1885.51: [tense] plpf.ἐγεγένητο Th.7.18
, al.; cf. γείνομαι:— come into a new state of being: hence,I abs., come into being opp. εἶναι, Emp.17.11, Pl.Phd. 102e, cf. Ti. 29a; and so,1 of persons, to be born, νέον γεγαώς new born, Od.19.400; ὑπὸ Τμώλῳ γεγαῶτας born (and so living) under Tmolus, Il.2.866;ἢ πρόσθε θανεῖν ἢ ἔπειτα γ. Hes.Op. 175
; γιγνομέναισι λάχη τάδ'.. ἐκράνθη at our birth, A.Eu. 347;γ. ἔκ τινος Il.5.548
, Hdt.7.11;πατρὸς ἐκ ταὐτοῦ E.IA 406
, cf. Isoc.5.136;σέθεν.. ἐξ αἵματος A.Th. 142
; less freq.ἀπό τινος Hdt.8.22
, etc.; , etc.; γεγονέναι κακῶς, καλῶς, Ar.Eq. 218, Isoc.7.37, etc.; κάλλιον, εὖ, Hdt. 1.146, 3.69; τὸ μὴ γενέσθαι not to have been born, A.Fr. 401: freq. with Numerals,ἔτεα τρία καὶ δέκα γεγονώς Hdt.1.119
;ἀμφὶ τὰ πέντε ἢ ἑκκαίδεκα ἔτη γενόμενος X.Cyr.1.4.16
;γεγονὼς ἔτη περὶ πεντήκοντα D. 21.154
; οἱ ὑπὲρ τὰ στρατεύσιμα ἔτη γεγονότες those of an age beyond.., X.Cyr.1.2.4: c. gen., , etc.: rarely with ordinals,ὀγδοηκοστὸν ἔτος γεγονώς Luc.Macr. 22
, cf. Plu.Phil.18.2 of things, to be produced,ὅσα φύλλα καὶ ἄνθεα γίγνεται ὥρῃ Od.9.51
; opp. ὄλλυσθαι, Parm.8.13,40; opp. ἀπόλλυσθαι, Anaxag.17, cf. Pl.R. 527b, etc.; opp. ἀπολείπειν, Diog. Apoll.7; opp. ἀπολήγειν, Emp.17.30;τὰ γιγνόμενα καὶ ἐξ ὧν γίγνεται Pl.Phlb. 27a
;ἁπλῇ διηγήσει ἢ διὰ μιμήσεως γ. Id.R. 392d
;ὁ ἐκ τῆς χώρας γιγνόμενος σῖτος X.Mem.3.6.13
; τὰ ἐν ἀγρῷ γιγνόμενα ib.2.9.4; of profits,καρποὶ οἱ ἐξ ἀγελῶν γ. Id.Cyr.1.1.2
, etc.; τὰ ἆθλα ἀπὸ τεττάρων ταλάντων ἐγένοντο were the produce of, i.e. were worth, 4 talents, Id.HG4.2.7; τὸ ἀπὸ τῶν αἰχμαλώτων γενόμενον ἀργύριον produced by [the ransom of].., Id.An.5.3.4; of sums, ὁ γεγονὼς ἀριθμὸς τῶν ψήφων the total of the votes, Pl.Ap. 36a; ἕκατον εἴκοσι στατήρων γίγνονται τρισχίλιαι τριακόσιαι ἑξήκοντα [δραχμαί] 120 staters amount to 3, 360 drachmae, D.34.24; so in Math., of products,ὁ ἐξ αὐτῶν γενόμενος ἀριθμός Euc.7.24
; ἀριθμὸς γενόμενος ἑκατοντάκις multiplied by 100, Papp.10.13; of times of day,ὡς ἡ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο Th.7.81
, etc.;ἕως ἂν φῶς γένηται Pl.Prt. 311a
;ἅμα ἕῳ γιγνομένῃ Th.4.32
; of Time in general, elapse, ;χρόνου γενομένου D.S.20.109
.b falldue,οἱ γιγνόμενοι δασμοί X.An.1.1.8
;τοὺς τόκους τοὺς γ. Isoc.17.37
; τὸ τίμημα τὸ γ., τὸ γ. ἀργύριον, D.24.82, Syngr. ap. eund.35.11;τὸ γ. μέρος X.HG7.4.33
;τὸ γ. τοῖ πλήθι τᾶς ζαμίαυ IG5(2).6
A20 (Tegea, iv B. C.): c. dat.,τὸ γ. τινὶ ἔλαιον UPZ 19.32
(ii B. C.);τοῖς γείτοσι τὸ γ. Thphr.Fr.97
;τὰ γ.
dues,PHib.
1.92 and 111 (iii B. C.): hence γιγνόμενος regular, normal, τίμημα, χάρις, D. 38.25; ἐν ταῖς γ. ἡμέραις in the usual number of days, X.Cyr.5.4.51; freq. in later Gk., as Luc.Tox.18, etc.3 of events, take place, come to pass, and in past tenses to be,καί σφιν ἄχος κατὰ θυμὸν ἐγίγνετο Il.13.86
, etc.;μάχη ἐγεγόνει Pl.Chrm. 153b
, etc.; ;ἡ νόσος ἤρξατο γίγνεσθαι Id.2.47
; πνεῦμα εἰώθει γ. ib.84; τὰ Ὀλύμπια γίγνεται, τραγῳδοὶ γίγνονται, are held, X.HG7.4.28, Aeschin.3.41, etc.; ψήφισμα γ. is passed, X.Cyr.2.2.21; πιστὰ γ., ὅρκοι γ., pledges are given, oaths taken, ib.7.4.3, D.19.158; γίγνεταί τι ὑπό τινος (masc.), X.An.7.1.30, (neut.) Pl.Tht. 200e;τὰ γιγνόμενα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἀθηναίων Th.6.88
;τὰ γενόμενα ἐξ ἀνθρώπων Hdt.Praef.
;ὕβρισμα ἐκ τῶν Σαμίων γενόμενον Id.3.48
;ἀπό τινος γ. X.An.5.6.30
;παρά τινος Pl.R. 614a
; ὃ μὴ γένοιτο which God forbid, D.10.27,28.21; but γένοιτο, = Amen, LXX Is.25.1; γένοιτο γένοιτο ib.Ps.71(72).19: Math., γεγονέτω suppose it done, Euc.6.23, etc.; it is done,Apoc.
16.17: c. dat. et part., γίγνεταί τί μοι βουλομένῳ, ἀσμένῳ (v. βούλομαι, ἄσμενος) ; οὐκ ἂν ἐμοί γε ἐλπομένῳ τὰ γένοιτο, i.e. I could not hope to see these things take place, Od.3.228;ἡδομένοισι ἡμῖν οἱ λόγοι γεγόνασι Hdt.9.46
, etc.; of sacrifices, omens, etc., οὐ γάρ σφι ἐγίνετο τὰ σφάγια χρηστά ib.61, cf.62;τὰ ἱερὰ καλὰ ἐγένετο X.An.6.4.9
: abs., τὰ διαβατήρια ἐγ. were favourable, Th.5.55;θυομένῳ οὐκ ἐγίγνετο τὰ ἱερά X.HG3.1.17
: in neut. part., τὸ γενόμενον the event, the fact, Th.6.54; τὰ γενόμενα the facts, X.Cyr.3.1.9, etc.;τὸ γιγνόμενον Pl.Tht. 161b
, etc.; τὰ γεγενημένα the past, X.An.6.2.14; τὸ γενησόμενον the future, Th.1.138; τὰ γεγονότα, opp. ὄντα, μέλλοντα, Pl.R. 392d, cf. Lg. 896a: of Time, ;ἕως ἄν τινες χρόνοι γένωνται Pl.Phd. 108c
; but in [tense] pf. and [tense] plpf., to have passed,ὡς διετὴς χρόνος ἐγεγόνεε Hdt.2.2
;πρὶν ἓξ μῆνας γεγονέναι Pl.Prt. 320a
: impers., ἐγένετο or γέγονεν ὥστε .. it happened, came to pass that.., X.HG5.3.10, Isoc. 6.40, etc.; ἐγένετο, ὡς ἤκουσεν.. καὶ ἐθυμώθη it came to pass, when he heard.. that.., LXX Ge.39.19;ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ πορεύεσθαι.. καὶ διήρχετο Ev.Luc.17.11
: c. inf., γίνεται εὑρεῖν it is possible to find, Thgn.639; ἐγένετο, c. acc. et inf., it came to pass that, Act.Ap.9.3, al., PAmh.2.135.10 (ii A. D.): c. dat. et inf.,ἐάν σοι γένηται στραφῆναι Epict.Ench. 23
.1 folld. by Nouns and Adjs.,δηΐοισι δὲ χάρμα γ. Il.6.82
, cf. 8.282;σωτὴρ γενοῦ μοι A.Ch.2
;κωλυτὴς γ. τινός Th.3.23
; [οὖροι] νηῶν πομπῆες γ. Od.4.362
, etc.; πάντα δὲ γιγνόμενος πειρήσεται turning every way, ib. 417; παντοῖος γ., folld. by μή, c. inf., Hdt.3.124;παντοῖος γ. δεόμενος Id.7.10
.γ; ἐκ πλουσίου πένης γ. X.An.7.7.28
;δημοτικὸς ἐξ ὀλιγαρχικοῦ γ. Pl.R. 572d
: rarely c. part., μὴ προδοὺς ἡμᾶς γένῃ, i.e. προδότης ἡμῶν, S.Aj. 588, cf. Ph. 773;μὴ ἀπαρνηθεὶς γένῃ Pl.Sph. 217c
;ἀποτετραμμένοι ἐγένοντο Th. 3.68
, etc.: with Pron., τί γένωμαι ; what am I to become, i.e. what is to become of me? A.Th. 297, cf. Theoc.15.51;οὐκ ἔχοντες ὅτι γένωνται Th.2.52
; less freq. with masc.,οὐδ' ἔχω τίς ἂν γενοίμαν A.Pr. 905
;γίγνονται πάνθ' ὅτι βούλονται Ar.Nu. 348
.b in past tenses, having ceased to be, ὁ γενόμενος στρατηγός the ex-strategus, POxy.38.11 (i A. D.); ἡ γ. γυνή τινος the former wife, PFlor.99.4 (i/ii A. D.).2 with Advbs.,κακῶς χρῆν Κανδαύλῃ γενέσθαι Hdt.1.8
; εὖ, καλῶς, ἡδέως γ., it goes well, etc., X.An.1.7.5, Arr.Epict.3.24.97, LXX To. 7.9; with personal construction,οἱ παρὰ Πλάτωνι δειπνήσαντες ἐς αὔριον ἡδέως γίγνονται Plu.2.127b
; δίχα γ. τοῦ σώματος to be parted from.., X.Cyr.8.7.20; τριχῇ γ. to be in three divisions, Id.An.6.2.16; γ. ἐμποδών, ἐκποδών, E.Hec. 372, X.HG6.5.38, etc.3 folld. by oblique cases of Nouns,a c. gen., γ. τῶν δικαστέων, τῶν γεραιτέρων, become one of.., Hdt.5.25, X.Cyr.1.2.15, cf. Ar.Nu. 107, etc.;βουλῆς γεγονώς D.C.36.28
(cf. supr.1.b); fall to, belong to,ἡ νίκη Ἀγησιλάου ἐγεγένητο X.HG4.3.20
; to be under control of,ὁ νοῦς ὅταν αὑτοῦ γένηται S. OC 660
, cf. Pl.Phdr. 250a (s. v.l.);ὑμῶν αὐτῶν γενέσθαι D.4.7
(alsoἐντὸς ἑωυτοῦ γ. Hdt.1.119
;ἐν ἑαυτῷ γ. X.An.1.5.17
;ἐν σαυτοῦ γενοῦ S.Ph. 950
);τὴν πόλιν ἐλπίδος μεγάλης γινομένην Plu.Phoc.23
: of things, to be at, i.e. cost, so much, , cf.X.Oec.20.23.c with Preps., γ. ἀπὸ δείπνου, ἐκ θυσίας, have done.., Hdt.2.78, 1.50; πολὺν χρόνον γ. ἀπό τινος to be separated from.., X.Mem.1.2.25; γ. εἴς τι turn into,τὸ κακὸν γ. εἰς ἀγαθόν Thgn.162
; freq. in LXX,ἐγενήθη μοι εἰς γυναῖκα Ge.20.12
; εἰς βρῶσιν ib.La.4.10; εἰς οὐδέν, εἰς κενόν, Act.Ap.5.36, 1 Ep.Thess. 3.5;ἐς Αακεδαίμονα Hdt.5.38
(in Hom. even without Prep.,ἐμὲ χρεὼ γ. Od.4.634
); γ. τι εἴς τινα comes to him, of a dowry, Is.3.36; of a ward, And.1.117; γ. ἐξ ὀφθαλμῶν τινι to be out of sight, Hdt.5.24; ἐξ ἀνθρώπων γ. disappear from.., Paus.4.26.6;γ. ἐν Χίῳ Hdt.5.33
, etc.; γ. ἐν .., to be engaged in.., οἱ ἐν ποιήσει γινόμενοι in poetry, Id.2.82; ἐν [πολέμῳ] Th.1.78;ἐν πείρᾳ γ. τινος X.An.1.9.1
; ἐν ὀργῇ, ἐν αἰτίᾳ πρός τινα γ., Plu.Flam.16, Rom.7; of things, ἐν καιρῷ γ. to be in season, X.HG4.3.2;ἐν τύχῃ γ. τινί τι Th.4.73
; γ. διὰ γηλόφων, of a road, X.An.3.4.24; but δι' ἔχθρας γ. τινί to be at enmity with, Ar.Ra. 1412; γ. ἐπὶ ποταμῷ arrive or be at.., Hdt.1.189, etc.; γ. ἐπί τινι fall into or be in one's power, X.An.3.1.13, etc.;ἐπὶ συμφοραῖς γ. D.21.58
codd. (- ᾶς Schaefer); γ. ἐπί τινι, also, to be set over.., X.Cyr.3.3.53; γ. ἐφ' ἡμῶν αὐτῶν to be alone, Aeschin.2. 36;γ. ἐπὶ τῆς διοικήσεως D.C.43.48
; γ. ἐπ' ἐλπίδος to be in hope, Plu.Sol.14: Math., γ. ἐπὶ ἀριθμόν to be multiplied into a number, Theol.Ar.3; γ. κατά τινα or τι to be near.. or opposite to.., in battle, X.Cyr.7.1.14, HG4.2.18; but κατὰ ξυστάσεις γ. to be formed into groups, Th.2.21;καθ' ἓν γ. Id.3.10
; καθ' αὑτοὺς γ. to be alone, D.10.52; γ. μετὰ τοῦ θείου to be with God, X.Cyr.8.7.27, etc.;ἡ νίκη γ. σύν τινι Id.Ages.2.13
; γ. παρ' ἀμφοτέροις τοῖς πράγμασι to be present on both sides, Th.5.26; γ. παρά τι to depend upon.., D.18.232; γ. περὶ τὸ συμβουλεύειν to be engaged in.., Isoc.3.12; γενοῦ πρός τινα go to So-and-so, PFay. 128, etc.; γ. πρὸς τῇ καρδίᾳ to be at or near.., Pl.Phd. 118, etc.; γ. πρός τινι to be engaged in.., Isoc. 12.270, D.18.176; αὐτὸς πρὸς αὑτῷ meditate, Plu.2.151c; soγ. πρὸς τὸ ἰᾶσθαι Pl.R. 604d
;πρὸς παρασκευήν Plb.1.22.2
: impers.,ἐπεὶ πρὸς ἡμέραν ἐγίγνετο X.HG2.4.6
; γενέσθαι πρός τινων to be inclined towards them, Hdt.7.22; γ. πρὸ ὁδοῦ to be forward on the way, Il.4.382; γ. ὑπό τινι to be subject to.., Hdt.7.11, Th.7.64; γ. ὑπὸ ταῖς μηχαναῖς to be under the protection of.., X.Cyr.7.1.34.Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > γίγνομαι
-
16 τύχη
τύχη [pron. full] [ῠ], ἡ, [dialect] Boeot. [full] τιούχα IG7.2809.1 (Hyettus, iii B. C.), [full] τούχα ib.3083 (Lebad., iii B. C.): (Aτεύχω, τυγχάνω A. 1.2
):—the act of a god,τύχᾳ δαίμονος Pi.O.8.67
; ;τύχᾳ θεῶν Pi.P.8.53
; σὺν θεοῦ τύχᾳ, σὺν Χαρίτων τύχᾳ, Id.N.6.24, 4.7;θείῃ τύχῃ Hdt.1.126
, 3.139, 4.8, 5.92.γ; ἐὰν θεία τις συμβῇ τ. Pl.R. 592a
;θείᾳ τινὶ τύχῃ Id.Ep. 327e
;ἐκ θείας τύχης S.Ph. 1326
;δαιμονίως ἔκ τινος τ. Pl.Ti. 25e
;πῶς οὖν μάχωμα θνητὸς ὢν θείᾳ τύχῃ; S.Fr. 196
; ἆρα θείᾳ κἀπόνῳ τάλας τύχῃ [ὄλωλε]; Id.OC 1585;ἐμὲ.. δαιμονία τις τύχη κατέχει Pl.Hp.Ma. 304c
: (lyr.);ἐξεπλήσσου τῇ τ. τῇ τῶν θεῶν Id.IA 351
(troch.);δαίμονος τύχα βαρεῖα Id.Rh. 728
(lyr.);τὰς.. δαιμόνων τ. ὅστις φέρει κάλλιστα Id.Fr.37
.b the act of a human being, πέμψον τιν' ὅστις σημανεῖ—ποίας τύχας; will order—what action? Id.IT 1209 (troch.).2 esp. ἀναγκαία τύχη, as a paraphrase for Ἀνάγκη, Necessity, Fate,τέθνηκ' Ὀρέστης ἐξ ἀναγκαίας τύχης S.El. 48
;τῆς ἀ. τ. οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν μεῖζον ἀνθρώποις κακόν Id.Aj. 485
; πρόστητ' ἀ. τ. ib. 803;εἴ τις ἀ. τ. γίγνοιτο Pl.Lg. 806a
: also pl.,ἀλλ' ἥκομεν γὰρ εἰς ἀναγκαίας τύχας θυγατρὸς αἱματηρὸν ἐκπρᾶξαι φόνον E. IA 511
.II regarded as an agent or cause beyond human control:1 fortune, providence, fate,πάντα τύχη καὶ μοῖρα, Περίκλεες, ἀνδρὶ δίδωσι Archil.16
;ἡμῖν ἐκ πάντων τοῦτ' ἀπένειμε τύχη Simon.100
;πύργοις δ' ἀπειλεῖ δείν', ἃ μὴ κραίνοι τύχη A.Th. 426
;ἐπ' εὐμενεῖ τύχᾳ Pi.O.14.15
;μετὰ τύχης ευ'μενοῦς Pl.Lg. 813a
; ;ὁρμώμενον βροτοῖσιν εὐπόμπῳ τύχῃ Id.Eu.93
: personified,Σώτειρα Τύχα Pi.O.12.2
;Τ. Σωτήρ A. Ag. 664
, cf. S.OT80; ἐμαυτὸν παῖδα τῆς Τ. νέμων τῆς εὖ διδούσης ib. 1080; <Τύχα>.. Προμαθείας θυγάτηρ Alcm.62
, cf. Pi.Fr.41, D.Chr. 63.7;πάντων τύραννος ἡ Τύχη 'στὶ τῶν θεῶν Trag.Adesp.506
, cf. 505;Τύχα, μερόπων ἀρχά τε καὶ τέρμα.. προφερεστάτα θεῶν Lyr.Adesp.139
.2 chance, regarded as an impersonal cause,τύχη φορὰ ἐξ ἀδήλου εἰς ἄδηλον, καὶ ἡ ἐκ τοῦ αὐτομάτου αἰτία δαιμονίας πράξεως Pl.Def. 411b
; coupled with τὸ αὐτόματον, Arist.Ph. 195b31, al.; defined asαἰτία ἄδηλος ἀνθρωπίνῳ λογισμῷ Stoic.2.281
; ;τὰ τῆς τύχης φέρειν δεῖ γνησίως τὸν εὐγενῆ Antiph.281
, cf. Apollod.Com.17, Alex.252, Men. 205;οὐκ ἔχουσιν αἱ τ. φρένας Alex.287
;τῆς ἀναγκαίας μέν, ἀγνώμονος δὲ τ. οὐχ ὡς δίκαιον ἦν, ἀλλ' ὡς ἐβούλετο, κρινάσης τὸν ἀγῶνα D.Ep.2.5
; personified and said to be blind, Men.417b, Kon.14, Plu. 2.98a;τί δ' ἂν φοβοῖτ' ἄνθρωπος, ᾧ τὰ τῆς τ. κρατεῖ, πρόνοια δ' ἐστὶν οὐδενὸς σαφής; S.OT 977
; ἂν μὲν ἡ τ. συνεπιλαμβάνηται.., ἂν δ' ἀντιπίπτῃ τὰ τῆς τ., Plb.2.49.7,8;ἡ Τ. σχεδὸν ἅπαντα τὰ τῆς οἰκουμένης πράγματα πρὸς ἓν ἔκλινε μέρος Id.1.4.1
, cf. 1.63.9, 2.38.5, 36.17.1;τῆς Τ. ὥσπερ ἐπίτηδες ἀναβιβαζούσης ἐπὶ σκηνὴν τὴν τῶν Ῥοδίων ἄγνοιαν Id.29.19.2
, cf. 23.10.16, Dem.Phal.39J.; οὐκ ἂν ἐν τύχῃ γίγνεσθαι σφίσι would not depend on chance, Th.4.73; , cf. 69; τύχῃ by chance, S.Ant. 1182, Ph. 546, Th.1.144, etc.; opp. φύσει, Pl.Prt. 323d; ἀπὸ τύχης, opp. ἀπὸ παρασκευῆς, Lys.21.10; opp. ἀπὸ φύσεως, Arist. Metaph. 1032a29;ἀπὸ τ. ἀπροσδοκήτου Pl.Lg. 920d
; , R. 499b, etc.;διὰ τύχην Isoc.4.132
, 9.45;δίκαιος οὐδεὶς ἀπὸ τύχης οὐδὲ διὰ τὴν τ. Arist.Pol. 1323b29
;κατὰ τύχην Th.3.49
, X.HG3.4.13;τῆς τ. εὖ μετεστεώσης Hdt.1.118
;τὸ τῆς τ. ἀφανές E.Alc. 785
, cf. D.4.45.III regarded as a result:1 good fortune, success,δὸς ἄμμι τ. εὐδαιμονίην τε h.Hom.11.5
;μοῦνον ἀνδρὶ γένοιτο τ. Thgn.130
;τ. μόνον προσείη Ar.Av. 1315
(lyr.);εἴ οἱ τ. ἐπίσποιτο Hdt.7.10
.δ, cf. 1.32; σὲ γὰρ θεοὶ ἐπορῶσι· οὐ γὰρ ἄν.. ἐς τοσοῦτο τύχης ἀπίκευ ib. 124;ἐπειδήπερ ἐν τούτῳ τύχης εἰσί Th.7.33
;σὺν τύχᾳ Pi.N.5.48
, cf. S.Ph. 775; σὺν τ. τινί A Ch.138, cf. Th.472;τύχᾳ Pi.N.10.25
, E.El. 594 (lyr.); οὐ πεποιθότες τύχῃ not believing in our good fortune, A.Ag. 668; γλῶσσαν ἐν τύχᾳ νέμων ib. 685 (lyr.); σοφῶν γὰρ ἀνδρῶν ταῦτα, μὴ 'κβάντας τύχης, καιρὸν λαβόντας, ἡδονὰς ἄλλας λαβεῖν without stepping out of success already attained, E.IT 907;τὰς γὰρ παρούσας οὐχὶ σῴζοντες τ. ὤλοντ' ἐρῶντες μειζόνων ἀβουλίᾳ Id.Fr. 1077
: c. gen. rei,Ζεῦ τέλει', αἰδῶ δίδοι καὶ τύχαν τερπνῶν γλυκεῖαν Pi.O.13.115
.2 ill fortune,τὰς ἐκ θεῶν τύχας δοθείσας.. φέρειν S.Ph. 1317
; κατὰ τύχας in misfortune, opp.κατὰ.. εὐπραγίας, Pl.Lg. 732c;τοιαύτῃσι περιέπιπτον τύχῃσι Hdt. 6.16
; τύχῃ by ill-luck, opp. ἀδικίᾳ, Antipho 6.1; opp. προνοίᾳ, Id.5.6; ἔστιν ἡ τ. τοῦ ἄρξαντος the ill-luck is his who began the fray, Id.4.4.8; of death, ἢν χρήσωνται τύχῃ, i. e. if they are killed, E.Heracl. 714, cf. And.1.120, X.Cyn.5.29;δεχομένοις λέγεις θανεῖν σε, τὴν τ. δ' αἱρούμεθα A.Ag. 1653
;τ. ἑλεῖν Id.Supp. 380
, cf. Pr. 106, 274, 290 (anap.); : personified, εἰ μὴ τὴν Τ. αὐτὴν λέγεις *misfortune herself, ib. 786.3 in a neutral sense, mostly in pl. 'fortunes',ποίαις ὁμιλήσει τύχαις Pi. N.1.61
;πρὸς τὸ παρὸν ἀεὶ βουλεύεσθαι καὶ ταῖς τ. ἐπακολουθεῖν Isoc.6.34
; τὴν ἐλπίδ' οὐ χρὴ τῆς τ. κρίνειν πάρος the event, S.Tr. 724;ἐπὶ τῇσι παρεούσῃσι τύχῃσι Hdt.7.236
;ἐγὼ δὲ τὴν παροῦσαν ἀντλήσω τ. A.Pr. 377
;φέρειν ἀνάγκη τὰς παρεστώσας τ. E.Or. 1024
: c. gen. rei,κοινὰς εἶναι τὰς τ. τοῖς ἅπασι καὶ τῶν κακῶν καὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν Lys.24
. 22.4 the quality of the fortune or fate may be indicated by an Adj., ἀγαθὴ τ. or ἡ ἀγαθὴ τ., A.Ag. 755 (lyr.), Ar. Pax 360, D.Ep.4.3, etc.;πολλῇ χρῷτ' ἂν ἀγαθῇ τ. Pl.Lg. 640d
; freq. in prayers and good wishes,εὐχώμεσθα Διὶ.. θεσμοῖς τοῖσδε τ. ἀγαθὴν καὶ κῦδος ὀπάσσαι Sol.[31]
; θεὸς τ. ἀγαθάν (sc. δότω) GDI1930, al. (Delph., ii B. C.): in nom.,θεός, τύχα ἀγαθά IG42(1).47.1
, 121.1 (Epid., iv B.C.), 73.1 (ibid., iii B.C.): freq. in dat., ἀγαθῇ τύχῃ by God's help, Lat. quod di bene vortant, ἀγαθᾷ τύχᾳ ib.103.119 (ibid., iv B. C.);ἀλλ' ἴωμεν ἀγαθῇ τ. Pl.Lg. 625c
;ταῦτα ποιεῖτ' ἀγ. τ. D.3.18
;τύχῃ ἀγαθῇ And. 1.120
, Pl.Smp. 177e, Cri. 43d, etc.; in Com. with crasis,ἡγοῦ δὴ σὺ νῷν τύχἀγαθῇ Ar.Av. 675
, cf. 436, Ec. 131, Nicostr.Com.19; as a formula in treaties, decrees, etc., Αάχης εἶπε, τύχῃ ἀγαθῇ τῇ Ἀθηναίων ποιεῖσθαι τὴν ἐκεχειρίαν Decr. ap. Th.4.118, etc.;ἀγ. τ. τῇ Ἀθηναίων IG12.39.40
; alsoἐπ' ἀγαθῇ τ. Ar.V. 869
, cf. Pl.Lg. 757e; μετ' ἀγαθῆς τ. ib. 732d; τύχῃ ἀμείνονι, ἐπ' ἀμείνοσι τύχαις, ib. 856e, 878a; alsoτύχᾳ σὺν ἔσλᾳ Sapph.Supp.9.4
;ἐπὶ τύχῃσι χρηστῇσι Hdt.1.119
: with κακός or equivalent words,τ. παλίγκοτος A.Ag. 571
;ἡ δέ τοι τ. κακὴ μὲν αὕτη γ' ἀλλὰ συγγνώμην ἔχει S.Tr. 328
;ἐν τοιᾷδε κείμενος κακῇ τ. Id.Aj. 323
;τίς τῆσδ' ἔτ' ἐχθίων τύχη; A. Pers. 438
; ;ὅταν τις ἡμῶν δυστυχῆ λάβῃ τ. Id.Tr. 471
, cf. Th.5.102;ἀλιτηριώδης τ. Pl. Lg. 881e
;ποινὴν καὶ κακὴν τ. S.E.M.5.16
.5 with gen. (or possess. Adj.) of the person who enjoys or endures the fortune or fate,τῶν ἐν Θερμοπύλαις θανόντων εὐκλεὴς μὲν ἁ τύχα, καλὸς δ' ὁ πότμος Simon.4.2
;θεῶν δ' ὄπιν ἄφθιτον αἰτέω, Εέναρκες, ὑμετέραις τύχαις Pi.P.8.72
;ὤμοι βαρείας ἆρα τῆς ἐμῆς τ. S.Aj. 980
;κατεδάκρυσε τὴν ἑαυτοῦ τ. X.Cyr.5.4.31
;ἐπὶ τῇ τῶν Ἀρκάδων τ. ἥσθησαν Id.HG7.1.32
;πρὸς τὰς τ. τῶν ἐναντίων ἐπαίρεσθαι Th.6.11
;τῆς ὑμετέρας τ. D.1.1
;τὴν ἰδίαν τ. τὴν ἐμὴν καὶ τὴν ἑνὸς ἡμῶν ἑκάστου Id.18.255
.IV the τ. or ἀγαθὴ τ. of a person or city is sts. thought of as permanently belonging to him or it, as a faculty for good fortune, destiny, almost = δαίμων 1.2, 11.3,τὸν δαίμονα καὶ τὴν τ. τὴν συμπαρακολουθοῦσαν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ φυλάξασθαι Aeschin.3.157
;ἐπισφαλές ἐστι πιστεύειν ἀνδρὸς ἑνὸς τύχῃ τηλικαῦτα πράγματα Plu.Fab.26
;νὴ τὴν σὴν τ. Arr.Epict.2.20.29
: personified,θύειν Τύχῃ Ἀγαθῇ πατρὸς καὶ μητρὸς Ποσειδωνίου κριόν SIG1044.34
(Halic., iv/iii B. C.); a statue of the Τύχη of the City of Antioch executed by Eutychides, Paus.6.2.7: so of rulers, (Halic., iii B.C.);διὰ τὴν τ. τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ κυρίου βασιλέως BGU1764.8
(i B. C.);νὴ τὴν Καίσαρος τ. Arr. Epict.4.1.14
;ὀμνύω τὴν.. Σεβαστοῦ τ. Sammelb.7440.19
(ii A. D.), cf. BGU1583.23 (ii A. D.); of officials, e.g. theἐπιστράτηγος, ἐάν σου τῇ εὐμενεστάτῃ τύχῃ δόξῃ Sammelb.7361.21
(iii A. D.).2 = Lat. Fortuna; Τ. Σωτήριος, = Fortuna Redux, Mon.Anc.Gr.6.7; Τ. Πρωτογένεια, = F. Primigenia, SIG1133 (Delos, ii B. C.).3 position, station in life,ἐγὼ μὲν δὴ τοιαύτῃ συμβεβίωκα τύχῃ.., σὺ δ' ὁ σεμνὸς.. σκόπει.. ποίᾳ τινὶ κέχρησαι τύχῃ.. τὸ μέλαν τρίβων κτλ. D.18.258
;πάσῃ τ. καὶ ἡλικίᾳ BCH15.184
, 198,204 ([place name] Panamara);οἰκέτης τὴν τ. Ael.NA7.48
; ;οἱ δουλικὴν τ. εἰληχότες POxy.1186.5
(iv A. D.), cf. 1101.7,11,21,24 (iv A. D.), etc.; rank,βουλευτικὴ τ. PLond.3.1015.1
,4 (vi A. D.), cf. Cod.Just. 1.3.52.1, 4.20.15.1, 9.5.2.V Astrol. uses:VI Pythag. name for 7, Theol.Ar.44. -
17 ἀνεπίτακτος
ἀνεπί-τακτος, ον,A subject to no control,τῆς ἀ. πᾶσιν ἐς τήν δίαιταν ἐξουσίας Th.7.69
, cf. Plu.2.987b. Adv. - τως without orders or command, J.AJ19.2.2, D.L.5.20.Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀνεπίτακτος
-
18 ἀπροαίρετος
ἀπροαίρ-ετος, ον,A without set purpose, not deliberate, of actions, Arist.EN 1135b10, Arr.Epict.2.16.1, Plot.1.2.5, etc. Adv.- τως Hp.Prog.2
, Arist. EN 1106a3, Phld. Ir.p.93 W., etc.2 of things, incapable of choice or purpose, Hermog. Id.2.4; not under the control of will, Phld.D.3Fr.75, M.Ant.6.41,al.Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀπροαίρετος
-
19 αἴρω
αἴρω fut. ἀρῶ; 1 aor. ᾖρα (ἦρα v.l.; TestAbr; GrBar); pf. ἦρκα Col 2:14. Pass.: 1 fut. ἀρθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἤρθην; pf. ἦρμαι J 20:1; Hs 9, 5, 4 (Hom.+; he, like some later wr., has ἀείρω).① to raise to a higher place or position, lift up, take up, pick upⓐ lit., of stones (Dio Chrys. 12 [13], 2) J 8:59 (cp. Jos., Vi. 303); Rv 18:21; Hs 9, 4, 7. Fish Mt 17:27; coffin 1 Cl 25:3; hand (X., An. 7, 3, 6) Rv 10:5 (Dt 32:40). Hands, in prayer 1 Cl 29:1 (Ael. Aristid. 24, 50 K.=44 p. 840 D.; 54 p. 691; PUps 8 p. 30 no. 14 [pre-Christian] Θεογένης αἴρει τὰς χεῖρας τῷ Ἡλίῳ; Sb 1323 [II A.D.] θεῷ ὑψίστῳ καὶ πάντων ἐπόπτῃ καὶ Ἡλίῳ καὶ Νεμέσεσι αἴρει Ἀρσεινόη ἄωρος τὰς χεῖρας). But αἴ. τὴν χεῖρα ἀπό τινος withdraw one’s hand fr. someone= renounce or withdraw fr. someone B 19:5; D 4:9. Of snakes pick up Mk 16:18. κλίνην Mt 9:6. κλινίδιον Lk 5:24. κράβαττον Mk 2:9, 11f; J 5:8–12. Of a boat that is pulled on board Ac 27:17. Of a spirit that carries a person away Hv 2, 1, 1 (cp. TestAbr B 10 p. 115, 11 [Stone p. 78] of angels). Take up a corpse to carry it away AcPt Ox 849 verso, 8 (cp. TestAbr A 20 p.103, 20 [Stone p. 54]). αἴ. σύσσημον raise a standard ISm 1:2 (Is 5:26); αἴ. τινὰ τῶν ἀγκώνων take someone by one’s arms Hv 1, 4, 3. For Ac 27:13 s. 6 below.—Pass. 2 Cl 7:4. ἄρθητι (of mountains) arise Mt 21:21; Mk 11:23. ἤρθη νεκρός Ac 20:9.ⓑ fig. αἴ. τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἄνω look upward (in prayer, as Ps 122:1; Is 51:6 al.) J 11:41. For 10:24 s. 5 below. αἴ. φωνήν raise one’s voice, cry out loudly (1 Km 11:4; 30:4; 2 Km 3:32 al.) Lk 17:13. πρός τινα Ac 4:24.ⓐ take/carry (along) lit. w. obj. acc. σταυρόν Mt 16:24; 27:32; Mk 8:34; 15:21; Lk 9:23. ζυγόν (La 3:27) Mt 11:29. τινὰ ἐπὶ χειρῶν 4:6; Lk 4:11 (both Ps 90:12). Pass. Mk 2:3. αἴ. τι εἰς ὁδόν take someth. along for the journey 6:8; Lk 9:3, cp. 22:36. Of a gambler’s winnings Mk 15:24.—Fig. δόξαν ἐφʼ ἑαυτὸν αἴ. claim honor for oneself B 19:3.ⓑ carry away, remove lit. ταῦτα ἐντεῦθεν J 2:16 (ins [218 B.C.]: ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ 7, ’34, p. 179, 15 ταῦτα αἰρέσθω; Just., D. 56, 3 σκευῶν ἀρθέντων). Crucified body of Jesus 19:38; cp. vs. 31; 20:2, 13, 15; of John the Baptist Mt 14:12; Mk 6:29. A stone from a grave-opening J 11:39, 41; pass. 20:1. οἱ αἴροντες οὐκ ἀνέφερον those who took something (a mouthful) brought nothing (to their mouth) GJs 18:2 (not pap). τὸ περισσεῦον the remainder Mt 14:20; 15:37; cp. Lk 9:17. περισσεύματα Mk 8:8. κλάσματα fragments 6:43; baskets 8:19f. ζώνην take off Ac 21:11; take: τὸ σόν what belongs to you Mt 20:14; τὰ ἀρκοῦντα what was sufficient for him Hs 5, 2, 9. αἴ. τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας get someth. fr. the house Mk 13:15; cp. vs.16 and Mt 24:17; cp. 24:18; Lk 17:31; take (a body) from a tomb J 20:2, 13, 15; take τινὰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου 17:15.③ to take away, remove, or seize control without suggestion of lifting up, take away, remove. By force, even by killing: abs. ἆρον, ἆρον away, away (with him)! J 19:15 (cp. POxy 119, 10 [Dssm., LO 168; LAE 188 n. 22]; Philo, In Flacc. 144; ἆρον twice also La 2:19 v.l., in different sense). W. obj. αἶρε τοῦτον Lk 23:18; cp. Ac 21:36; 22:22. ἆραι τόν μάγον AcPl Ha 4, 35f; αἶρε τοὺς ἀθέους (s. ἄθεος 2a) MPol 3:2; 9:2 (twice); sweep away Mt 24:39; ὡς μελλούσης τῆς πόλεως αἴρεσθαι as though the city were about to be destroyed AcPl Ha 5, 17; cp. κόσμος ἔρεται (=αἴρεται) ἐμ πυρί 2, 26f. W. the connot. of force or injustice or both (Epict. 1, 18, 13; PTebt 278, 27; 35; 38 [I A.D.]; SSol 5:7): τὸ ἱμάτιον Lk 6:29; cp. vs. 30; D 1:4. τὴν πανοπλίαν all his weapons Lk 11:22; τάλαντον Mt 25:28; cp. Lk 19:24. Fig. τὴν κλεῖδα τῆς γνώσεως 11:52. Pass.: Mt 13:12; Mk 4:25; Lk 8:18; 19:26. Conquer, take over (Diod S 11, 65, 3 πόλιν) τόπον, ἔθνος J 11:48. For Lk 19:21f s. 4 below. αἴ. τὴν ψυχὴν ἀπό τινος J 10:18 (cp. EFascher, Deutsche Theol. ’41, 37–66).—Pass. ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς Ac 8:33b (Is 53:8; Just., D. 110, 6). ἀφʼ ὑμῶν ἡ βασιλεία Mt 21:43.—Of Satan τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐσπαρμένον εἰς αὐτούς Mk 4:15; cp. Lk 8:12. τὴν χαρὰν ὑμῶν οὐδεὶς αἴρει ἀφʼ ὑμῶν no one will deprive you of your joy J 16:22. ἐξ ὑμῶν πᾶσαν ὑπόκρισιν rid ourselves of all pretension B 21:4; ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας τὰς διψυχίας αἴ. put away doubt fr. their heart Hv 2, 2, 4. αἴ. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ put away fr. oneself Hm 9:1; 10, 1, 1; 10, 2, 5; 12, 1, 1. αἴ. ἐκ (τοῦ) μέσου remove, expel (fr. among) (Epict. 3, 3, 15; Plut., Mor. 519d; BGU 388 II, 23 ἆρον ταῦτα ἐκ τοῦ μέσου; PHib 73, 14; Is 57:2) 1 Cor 5:2 (v.l. ἐξαρθῇ); a bond, note, certificate of indebtedness αἴ. ἐκ τοῦ μέσου destroy Col 2:14. Of branches cut off J 15:2. Prob. not intrans., since other exx. are lacking, but w. ‘something’ supplied αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱματίου the patch takes someth. away fr. the garment Mt 9:16; cp. Mk 2:21. Remove, take away, blot out (Eur., El. 942 κακά; Hippocr., Epid. 5, 49, p. 236 pain; cp. Job 6:2; IG II, 467, 81 ζημίας; Epict. 1, 7, 5 τὰ ψευδῆ; SIG 578, 42 τ. νόμον; Pr 1:12; EpArist 215; Just., D. 117, 3) τὴν ἁμαρτίαν τ. κόσμου J 1:29, 36 v.l.; 1 J 3:5 (Is 53:12 Aq., s. PKatz, VetusT 8, ’58, 272; cp. 1 Km 15:25; 25:28). Pass. Ac 8:33a (Is 53:8); Eph 4:31. Fig. take, in order to make someth. out of the obj. 1 Cor 6:15.④ to make a withdrawal in a commercial sense, withdraw, take, ext. of 2 αἴρεις ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔθηκας Lk 19:21f (banking t.t.: JBernays, Ges. Abh. I 1885, 272f; JSmith, JTS 29, 1928, 158).⑤ to keep in a state of uncertainty about an outcome, keep someone in suspense, fig. ext. of 1 αἴ. τὴν ψυχήν τινος J 10:24 (Nicetas, De Manuele Comm. 3, 5 [MPG CXXXIX 460a]: ἕως τίνος αἴρεις, Σαρακηνέ, τὰς ψυχὰς ἡμῶν; The expr. αἴ. τὴν ψυχήν w. different mng. Ps 24:1; 85:4; 142:8; Jos., Ant. 3, 48).⑥ to raise a ship’s anchor for departure, weigh anchor, depart, ext. of 1, abs. (cp. Thu. et al.; Philo, Mos. 1, 85; Jos., Ant. 7, 97; 9, 229; 13, 86 ἄρας ἀπὸ τῆς Κρήτης κατέπλευσεν εἰς Κιλίκιαν) Ac 27:13.—Rydbeck 155f; B. 669f. DELG s.v. 1 ἀείρω. M-M. TW. -
20 γνώμη
γνώμη, ης, ἡ (s. γινώσκω; w. var. mngs. since Pind., Pre-Socr.; BSnell, Die Ausdrücke f. den Begriff des Wissens in der vorplatonischen Philosophie 1924, 20–30; Hdt.+)① that which is purposed or intended, purpose, intention, mind, mind-set ἐν αὐτῇ γνώμῃ in unity of mind 1 Cor 1:10; sim. Rv 17:13 (μία γνώμη as Demosth. 10, 59; Plut., Cam. 150 [40, 2]; Ael. Aristid. 23, 31 K.=42 p. 778 D.; SIG 135, 21; Pollux 8, 151 μίαν γ. ἔχειν; Philo, Mos. 1, 235; Jos., Ant. 7, 60; 276; s. WvanUnnik in: Studies in John Presented to Prof. Dr. JSevenster, ’70, 209–20). ἐν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ γνώμῃ under the control of the mind of J. C. IEph 3:2; IPhld ins; ἡ εἰς θεὸν γ. mind directed toward God IRo 7:1; IPhld 1:2; ἡ ἐν θεῷ γ. mind fixed in God IPol 1:1. γ. τοῦ θεοῦ purpose/will of God IEph 3:2 (here also Christ as τοῦ πατρὸς ἡ γ., i.e., the personification of what God has in mind for appropriate conduct.—Jos., Ant. 2, 309; 3, 16; 17 τοῦ θεοῦ γ. is clearly God’s will. Likew. Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 100 §421 κατὰ γνώμην θεῶν; IAndrosIsis, Kyme 40 p. 124 Peek; OGI 383, 110 [I B.C.]; Just., D. 95, 2; 125, 4; Tat. 32, 2); IRo 8:3; ISm 6:2; IPol 8:1; ἡ τ. ἐπισκόπου γ. IEph 4:1; of the devil θλιβέντες τῇ γνώμῃ αὐτοῦ oppressed by his design IPhld 6:2 (γνώμῃ as instrumental dat. in Pind., N. 10, 89). γ. ἀγαθή good will or motive B 21:2 (cp. SIG 75, 28).—γ. ὀρθή IEph 1:1 v.l. (Lghtf.); γ. ἀλλοτρία=(behaves) in a contrary state of mind IPhld 3:3 (cp. 2 below).—As used in diplomatic parlance (s. OGI 315, 82f al.) B 2:9 of divine attitude or disposition = mind-set.② a viewpoint or way of thinking about a matter, opinion, judgment, way of thinking (earliest use Hdt. 1, 120 [Parm. 8, 61 is questionable]; Dio Chrys. 55 [72], 12 ἑπτὰ σοφῶν τ. γνώμας; Vi. Aesopi G 20 ἡ τοῦ φίλου γνώμη; Sir 6:23; 2 Macc 14:20; 4 Macc 9:27; Jos., Ant. 13, 416) Ac 4:18 D; κατὰ τὴν ἐμὴν γ. in my judgment 1 Cor 7:40 (κατὰ τ. γ. as PPetr II, 11; I, 1; Wsd 7:15); γ. διδόναι express an opinion, appraise a matter, offer counsel or direction (for the phrase cp. Diod S 20, 16, 1 τ. ἐναντίαν δοὺς γνώμην; for the sense ‘direction, guidance’ s. also Iren. 4, 37, 2 [Harv. II 287, 8]) 1 Cor 7:25; 2 Cor 8:10; ἀλλοτρία γ. alien view IPhld 3:3 (cp. Just., D. 35, 6 of heresies). This mng. is poss. Phlm 14, and the phrase χωρὶς τῆς σῆς γ. can be understood in the sense without your input, but s. 3 below.③ the act of expressing agreement with a body of data, approval (Polyb. 2, 21, 3 Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 96 §403 γ. δημοκρατικῆς διανοίας=showing preference for republican government; Jos., Ant. 18, 336) χωρὶς τῆς σῆς γ. Phlm 14: numerous versions (incl. NRSV, REB) and comm. favor approval, consent (s. 2 above); also ἄνευ γνώμης σου IPol 4:1 (exx. fr. Hellenistic times for both in Nägeli 33; also Diod S 16, 50, 8 ἄνευ τῆς ἐκείνου γνώμης; IAndrosIsis [δοξάζω 2]; UPZ 112, III 3 [III B.C.] al.). μετὰ γνώμης τινός w. someone’s approval (Isaeus 2, 8; Demosth. 25, 10; Diod S 16, 91, 2 μετὰ τῆς τῶν θεῶν γνώμης; UPZ 27, 1 [II B.C. al.) IPol 5:2. S. Renehan ’82, 49.④ a declaration that expresses formal consideration of a matter, declaration, decision, resolution (freq. used as a t.t. for official proposals and proclamations: s. Herodas 2, 86 γνώμῃ δικαίῃ of judges; IPriene 105, 31 [9 B.C.] γνώμη τοῦ ἀρχιερέως; POxy 54, 12; PFay 20, 4; PBrem 15, 8 al.) of God Rv 17:17; w. impv. foll. γ. ἀγαθή gracious pronouncement i.e. a declaration that displays God’s gracious disposition 1 Cl 8:2. Sim. resolve, decision (Thu. 1, 53, 2; 2, 86, 5 γ. ἔχοντες μὴ ἐκπλεῖν; POxy 1280, 5 ἑκουσίᾳ καὶ αὐθαιρέτῳ γνώμῃ; En 6:4; Philo, In Flacc. 145, Spec. Leg. 2, 88 al.; Jos., Ant. 10, 253; Tat. 7:2 αὐτεξουσίῳ γ.; Ath. 34, 1 ὑπὸ χειρὸς καὶ γνώμης) Ac 20:3 (γίνομαι 7); of a proposal Hs 5, 2, 8.—SMouraviev, Glotta 51, ’73, 69–78. B. 1240. DELG s.v. γιγνώσκω. M-M. TW. Sv.
- 1
- 2
См. также в других словарях:
Control — Con*trol , n. [F. contr[^o]le a counter register, contr. fr. contr r[^o]le; contre (L. contra) + r[^o]le roll, catalogue. See {Counter} and {Roll}, and cf. {Counterroll}.] 1. A duplicate book, register, or account, kept to correct or check… … The Collaborative International Dictionary of English
control group — Control Con*trol , n. [F. contr[^o]le a counter register, contr. fr. contr r[^o]le; contre (L. contra) + r[^o]le roll, catalogue. See {Counter} and {Roll}, and cf. {Counterroll}.] 1. A duplicate book, register, or account, kept to correct or… … The Collaborative International Dictionary of English
without any restraint — without restriction, without control … English contemporary dictionary
Control engineering — Control systems play a critical role in space flight Control engineering or Control systems engineering is the engineering discipline that applies control theory to design systems with predictable behaviors. The practice uses sensors to measure… … Wikipedia
Without You (песня Дэвида Гетта) — «Without You» Сингл Дэ … Википедия
Control (Janet Jackson song) — Control Single by Janet Jackson from the album Control … Wikipedia
Control Myself — Single by LL Cool J featuring Jennifer Lopez from the album Todd Smith … Wikipedia
CONTROL-M — is batch scheduling software produced by BMC Software, originally written for mainframes but also available for distributed computing platforms including Unix, Windows, Linux and OpenVMS environments. BMC Software claims that CONTROL M is the… … Wikipedia
Without You (canción de David Guetta) — «Without You» Sencillo de David Guetta con Usher del álbum Nothing but the Beat Publicación 27 de septiembre de 2011 Formato Descarga digital Género(s) … Wikipedia Español
Control banding — is a qualitative or semi quantitative risk assessment and management approach to promoting occupational health and safety. It is intended to minimize worker exposures to hazardous chemicals and other risk factors in the workplace and to help… … Wikipedia
Control System Integrators Association — Formation 1994 Type Industry Association Headquarters Madison, WI Location United States Executive Director Bob Lowe … Wikipedia